JP2020151425A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of improving a performance effect of a decorative pattern variable display.SOLUTION: A game machine comprises pattern display means for variable displaying a plurality of patterns according to a lottery result of whether or not to generate a profit state, then temporary stop displaying a combination of patterns according to the lottery result, and then determination stop displaying the same. A prescribed variable display for a prescribed variation time is configured so that, if a time during a first stop operation since start of a stop operation of a pattern which is first temporarily stopped, until the pattern is temporarily stopped is LMT(second), and a time during a second stop operation since start of the stop operation of the pattern which is finally temporarily stopped until the pattern is temporarily stopped, is CMT(second), LMT>CMT is satisfied.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 28

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

A game machine, for example, a bullet game machine, is subjected to a big hit lottery when the ball enters the starting port, and a decorative symbol variation display is performed in which a plurality of production symbols displaying numbers 1 to 9 are variablely displayed. , Various effects that reflect the big hit lottery result are executed during the variable display. Then, when the game execution time elapses, the combination of the effect symbols according to the jackpot lottery result is stopped and displayed, whereby the current game result is notified (for example, Patent Document 1 below).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2018-68674

In the decorative symbol variation display, the effect symbol is used to display the effect such as reach status and pseudo-ream, and to notify the final game result (big hit lottery result). It functions as important identification information for notifying the start and end of the game, and can be said to be the core of the symbol variation display game. That is, the decorative pattern variation display is important not only to enrich the variation of the effect by the display operation, but also to make it difficult to feel the occurrence of the variation slump (the period during which the game is not executed). Is considered to be.

Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the effect of displaying decorative symbol variation.

The above object of the present invention is achieved by the following means. The corresponding elements in the embodiments are shown in parentheses, but the present invention is not limited thereto.
(1) A symbol display means that displays a plurality of symbols in a variable manner according to the lottery result of whether or not to generate a profit state, temporarily stops and then displays a combination of symbols according to the lottery result, and then confirms and stops.
In a game machine equipped with
The predetermined fluctuation display of the predetermined fluctuation time is
Let LMT (seconds) be the time during the first stop operation from the time when the first temporarily stopped symbol starts the stop operation to the time when the symbol temporarily stops.
The following relational expression (A) is satisfied when the time during the second stop operation from the time when the last temporarily stopped symbol starts the stop operation to the time when the symbol temporarily stops is CMT (seconds).
A game machine that features that.
LMT> CMT (A)
(2) The symbol display means has a high-speed fluctuation display in which the symbol is displayed with a first transmittance and a low-speed fluctuation display in which the symbol is displayed with a second transmittance lower than the first transmittance as the fluctuation display of the symbol. Display and is feasible,
In the predetermined fluctuation display of the predetermined fluctuation time,
During the first stop operation, the second and subsequent temporarily stopped symbols are displaying the high-speed fluctuation.
The gaming machine according to (1) above.

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the effect of displaying decorative symbol variation.

It is an external view of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the game board and the effect button. It is a block diagram which shows the control device. It is explanatory drawing which provides the explanation of the winning type and the game state transition. It is explanatory drawing which provides the explanation of the screen display of the liquid crystal display device. It is explanatory drawing used for the explanation of the look-ahead notice production. It is a flowchart which shows the main process on the main control side. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process of a main control side. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol management process in FIG. FIG. 1 is a flowchart showing a start port check process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation start processing in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the game state transition preparation process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the process during special symbol change in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the first half part of the special symbol confirmation time processing in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the latter half part of the special symbol confirmation time processing in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special electric accessory management process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit end processing in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the production control side main processing. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process on the effect control side. It is a flowchart which shows the hold addition command reception process in the command analysis process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the decoration symbol designation command reception process in the command analysis process in FIG. It is a figure which shows the fluctuation pattern distribution designation number table. It is a figure which shows the game state transition table selection table. It is a figure which shows the game state transition table. It is a figure which shows the fluctuation pattern distribution table selection table. It is a figure which shows the hit variation pattern distribution table (also used at the time of winning). It is a figure which shows the loss fluctuation pattern distribution table (also used at the time of winning). It is a figure which shows the list of the winning command at the time of a hit, and the command of a hit variation pattern designation. It is a figure which shows the list of the winning command at the time of loss, and the loss variation pattern designation command. It is a timing chart which shows the decorative pattern effect which concerns on a normal variation 13s. This is a timing chart focusing on the stop operation pattern of the decorative pattern. It is a figure which shows the example which the stop operation pattern of a decorative pattern effect differs depending on the effect to be executed. It is a figure which shows the example which the stop operation pattern of a decorative symbol effect is different when the same effect is executed with the variation pattern which has different variation time. It is a figure which shows the example which the stop operation pattern of a decorative symbol effect is different when the same effect is executed with the variation pattern which has different variation time. It is a reference figure for comparing the decorative pattern effect shown in FIG. 31 and FIG. 32. It is a figure which shows the example which the stop operation pattern is different depending on the effect type to be executed and the presence or absence thereof. It is a figure which shows the example which the stop operation pattern is different depending on the production stage. It is a figure which shows the example which the reach stop operation pattern is different depending on the effect type to be executed, and the presence or absence thereof. It is a figure which shows the example which the reach stop operation pattern is different depending on the production stage. It is a figure which shows the modification of the stop operation pattern. It is a figure which shows the modification of the stop operation pattern. It is a figure which shows the modification of the stop operation pattern. It is a figure which shows the modification of the stop operation pattern.

Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the gaming machine according to the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. In the embodiment described below, a pachinko gaming machine will be described as an example of the gaming machine according to the present invention.

<1. Outline of configuration: Fig. 1 and Fig. 2>
An outline of the configuration of the pachinko gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 and 2. FIG. 1 is a front perspective view showing the appearance of the pachinko gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 2 is a view showing the front side of the gaming board.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1 (hereinafter abbreviated as “game machine 1”), a frame-shaped front frame 2 is attached to the front surface of a wooden outer frame 4 so as to be openable and closable, and a game attached to the back surface of the front frame 2. The game board 3 (see FIG. 2) is mounted in a board storage frame (not shown), and the game area 3a formed on the surface of the game board 3 faces the opening of the front frame 2. A glass door 6 that supports transparent glass is provided on the front side of the game area 3a. Further, on the back side of the game board 3, various control boards (see FIG. 3) for controlling the game operation are arranged.

A key cylinder (not shown) for unlocking the door is provided on the front side of the glass door 6, and if a key is inserted into this key cylinder and operated on one side, the locked state of the glass door 6 with respect to the front frame 2 can be obtained. By operating the other side, the locked state of the front frame 2 with respect to the outer frame 4 can be released and the front frame 2 can be opened to the front side.

Below the glass door 6, a front operation panel 7 that is pivotally supported by a hinge (not shown) on the front frame 2 is arranged. The front operation panel 7 is provided with an upper saucer unit 8, and the upper saucer unit 8 is formed with an upper saucer 9 for storing the discharged game balls.

Further, the upper saucer unit 8 has a ball removal button 14 for pulling out the game balls stored in the upper saucer 9 below the game machine 1, and a game ball lending device (not shown) on the island facility side. A ball lending button 11 for requesting the payout of the ball and a card return button 12 for requesting the return of the valuable medium inserted in the game ball lending device are provided.

Further, the upper tray unit 8 is composed of a push button type effect button 13 (first operating means), a button 75a pointing upward, a right button 75b, a lower button 75c, and a left button 75d, and is composed of up, down, left, and right. A cross-shaped direction key 75 (second operating means) that can be input and operated in a direction is provided. The effect button 13 and the direction key 75 function as an operation means that can be operated by the player, and a predetermined operation valid reception period (button valid period) in a specific advance notice effect (for example, "player participation type effect" described later). ), The reception of operation input is activated, and if a predetermined operation (for example, one press, long press, repeated hits, etc.) is performed during this valid period, the production may change before and after the operation. It is possible. In addition, these operation means allow the player to set his / her favorite game on the "game setting screen" related to the waiting for customers (during the "demo start waiting effect" or "customer waiting effect (demo screen)" described later). It is also used when doing. The game setting screen is, for example, a menu screen on which the player can set a game such as a desired volume and light intensity. The effect button 13 is provided with a built-in lamp (button LED 13b) inside, and the operation reception valid period (for example, lighting or blinking in a predetermined color) and the operation are performed depending on the difference in the light emitting mode of the button LED 13b. It is possible to notify the reception invalid period (for example, when the light is off).

A launch operation handle 15 for operating the launch device 32 (see FIG. 3) is provided on the right end side of the front operation panel 7. As the launching device 32, a device having a launching performance of about 100 shots per minute is adopted.

Further, speakers 46 that exert a sound effect (sound effect) by sound are provided on both sides of the upper part of the front frame 2 and on the upper side of the firing operation handle 15. Further, in a suitable place of the game machine, for example, a decorative member around the front frame of the glass door 6 and the inside of the center decorative body 48 (see FIG. 2), a decorative lamp 45 (for directing) that exerts a light effect by decorating light. A plurality of LEDs) are provided.

(Game board: Fig. 2)
Next, the configuration of the game board 3 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in the figure, a ball guide rail 5 for guiding the launched game ball is annularly mounted on the game board 3 as a board surface partition member, and a substantially circular region surrounded by the ball guide rail 5 is formed on the game board 3. The game area 3a and the four corners are non-game areas.

A liquid crystal display (LCD) 36 is provided in a substantially central portion of the game area 3a. Under the control of the effect control unit 24, which will be described later, the liquid crystal display device 36 independently has a plurality of types of decorative symbols (for example, a left symbol) in a predetermined display area (symbol variation display area), such as numbers, characters, and symbols. Various effects including the variable display operation (variable display and stop display) of the three decorative symbols (see FIG. 5A) of the middle symbol and the right symbol are displayed by images.

Further, in the game area 3a, a center decorative body 48 is provided so as to surround the display surface of the liquid crystal display device 36 in a long-winding manner. The center decorative body 48 is provided along the front side of the game board 3, forms a front mounting plate 48a fixed to the game board 3 and an outer periphery of the center decorative body 48, and surrounds the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 36. The armor frame portion 48b is integrally provided to protect the display surface of the liquid crystal display device 36 from the surrounding game balls, and the flow path of the game balls is distributed to the left and right depending on the launch strength or stroke length of the game balls. It works as a flow path distribution means that enables this. In the present embodiment, a floating region through which the game ball can pass is formed between the upper surface of the center decorative body 48 and the ball guide rail 5, and the game ball driven into the upper side of the game area 3a by the launching device 32. Is distributed to the left and right on the upper side of the armor frame portion 48b, and flows down either the left flow path 3b on the left side of the center ornament 48 or the right flow path 3c on the right side.

In addition, the non-game area near the upper right edge (upper right corner) of the game board 3 is a various function display unit, and the 7-segment display (with dots) is on the upper start port 34 (for the first special symbol) and the lower. Special symbol display device 38a (first special symbol display device: first special symbol display means) and special symbol display device 38b (first special symbol display device: first special symbol display means) configured side by side corresponding to the start port 35 (for the second special symbol). A second special symbol display device: a second special symbol display means) is provided. In the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b, a "special symbol variation display game" is executed by the variation display operation (variation display and stop display) of the "special symbol" represented by the 7-segment display. Then, in the liquid crystal display device 36, the decorative symbol by the image is variablely displayed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol by the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b, and various notice effects (effect images) are displayed. At the same time, a'decorative pattern variable display game'is being executed. The details of the special symbol variation display game and the decorative symbol variation display game will be described later.

Further, in the various function display units, a composite display device (LED display for holding composite display) 38c composed of a 7-segment display (with dots) is arranged next to the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b. The compound is called the display of the number of operation-holding balls of the special symbol 1, the display of the number of operation-holding balls of the special symbol 2, the display of the number of operation-holding balls of the normal symbol, the fluctuation time shortening function in operation (during time reduction), and This is because it is a hold / time saving / high-accuracy composite display device (hereinafter, simply referred to as "composite display device") having five display functions of state notification during a high-probability state (high-probability).

Further, the various function display units are provided with a normal symbol display device 39a (normal symbol display means) in which a plurality of (two in this embodiment) LEDs are arranged next to the composite display device 38c. In the ordinary symbol display device 39a according to the present embodiment, the ordinary symbol variation display game is executed by the variation display operation of the ordinary symbol represented by the two LEDs. For example, as a variable display operation, the normal symbol by LED repeats turning on and off alternately like a seesaw, and by stopping with either side lit, it has become clear whether the normal symbol variable display game is correct or not. There is.

In addition, a right-handed display device 39b is provided adjacent to the normal symbol display device 39a. The right-handed display device 39b is advantageous for "right-handed" in which the game ball aims to pass (flow) through the right flow path 3c by the combination of the LED lighting and extinguishing states, or the game ball is on the left. Notifies whether "left-handed" aiming to pass (flow) through the flow path 3b is advantageous. For example, it is notified that when the light emitting state of the LED is in the lit state, it is advantageous to hit right, and when it is off, it is advantageous to hit left.

Further, a round number display device 39c is provided in which two LEDs (round display LEDs) are arranged adjacent to the right-handed display device 39b. The round number display device 39c notifies the specified number of rounds (maximum number of rounds) related to the jackpot by combining the lighting / extinguishing states of the plurality of LEDs.

Below the center decoration body 48, an upper starting port 34 (first special symbol starting port: first starting means) and a lower starting port 35 (second special symbol starting port: second starting means) are provided. A normal variable winning device 41 is provided above and below, and detection sensors 34a and 35a (upper start port sensor 34a, lower start port sensor 35a: see FIG. 3) for detecting the passage of a game ball are formed inside each of the devices. Has been done.

The upper start port 34, which is the first special symbol start port, is the first special symbol in the special symbol display device 38a (first special symbol display device) (hereinafter, the first special symbol is referred to as “special symbol 1”. It is a winning opening related to the starting conditions of the variable display operation (referred to as "Special Figure 1" in some cases), and is a "fixed winning rate type" that does not have a "starting opening opening / closing means" that allows the starting opening to be opened or expanded. It is configured as a "winning device". In the present embodiment, due to the action of the game ball falling direction changing member (for example, a game nail (not shown), a windmill 44, a center decoration body 48, etc.) in the game area 3a, a left flow path to the upper start port 34 The game ball that has flowed down 3b has a structure that makes it easy to enter (win), whereas the game ball that has flowed down the right flow path 3c has a structure that makes it difficult or impossible to enter.

The ordinary variable winning device 41 is configured as a "winning rate variable winning device" in which the winning rate of the game ball at the starting port can be changed by the starting port opening / closing means. In the present embodiment, a pair of left and right movable wing pieces (movable members) 47 are provided as a starting port opening / closing means, and the movable wing pieces 47 perform an opening / closing operation to open and close the lower starting port 35, which is a second special symbol starting port. Can be opened or expanded.

Further, the lower start port 35 of the normal variable winning device 41 is referred to as a second special symbol (hereinafter, the second special symbol is referred to as "special symbol 2") in the special symbol display device 38b (second special symbol display device). , In some cases, abbreviated as "Special Figure 2"), which is a winning opening related to the starting condition of the variable display operation, and the winning area of the lower starting opening 35 depends on the operating state (operated or non-operating) of the movable wing piece 47. It is converted into an open state that facilitates winning (easy winning state) and a closed state that makes it more difficult to win or makes it impossible to win than the open state (difficult to win). In the present embodiment, when the movable wing piece 47 is inactive, it holds a closed state (a winning impossible state) in which the lower starting port 35 cannot be won.

Further, on both sides of the ordinary variable winning device 41, four general winning openings 43 (43a to 43d) are arranged on the left side and one (43e) on the right side, for a total of five, and a game is provided inside each of them. A general winning opening sensor 43h (see FIG. 3) for detecting the passage of a ball is formed.

Further, an ordinary symbol starting port 37 (third starting means) composed of a passing gate through which a game ball can pass is provided diagonally upward to the right of the ordinary variable winning device 41, that is, above the middle portion of the right flow path 3c. Has been done. The normal symbol start port 37 is a winning port related to the fluctuation display operation of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display device 39a, and inside the normal symbol start port sensor 37a (see FIG. 3), which detects a passing game ball. Is formed. In the present embodiment, the normal symbol start port 37 is formed only on the right flow path 3c side and not on the left flow path 3b side, but the present invention is not limited to this, and both flow paths may be formed. ..

In the middle of the route from the normal symbol start port 37 in the right flow path 3c to the normal variable winning device 41, the large winning opening 50 can be opened or expanded by the recessed open door 52b. A device 52 (special electric accessory) is provided, and a large winning opening sensor 52a (see FIG. 3) for detecting a game ball that has entered the large winning opening 50 is formed inside the device 52 (special electric accessory).

The circumference of the large winning opening 50 is a bulging portion (decorative member) 55 bulging from the surface of the game board 3, and the upper side 55a of the bulging portion 55 forms a downstream guide portion of the right flow path 3c. There is. If the large winning opening 50 is closed by the open door 52b (the large winning opening is closed), the downstream guide portion of the right flow path 3c (by forming a surface continuous with the upper side 55a of the bulging portion 55). It is designed to form a part of the upper side 55a). Further, in the downstream region of the right flow path 3c, in the region above the upper side 55a of the bulge portion 55, to be exact, in the game region above the grand prize opening 50, the flow path correction plate is substantially parallel to the flow direction of the game ball. The 51d is projected so as to move the flowing game ball toward the large winning opening 50.

The process of entering the game ball into the grand prize opening 50 is as follows. The game ball that has passed through the floating area between the upper surface of the center decorative body 48 and the ball guide rail 5 is on the top surface (upper side) 55a of the bulging portion 55 that protrudes from the game board 3 and functions as a guide for the game ball. It flows down along the rail. Then, the game ball comes into contact with the right end of the flow path correction plate 51d protruding from the three surfaces of the game board, whereby the flow direction of the game ball is corrected to the direction (downward direction) of the large winning opening 50. At this time, if the large winning opening 50 is covered by the retractable open door 52b (the large winning opening is closed), the game ball rolls on this, and a gauge configuration (not shown) is further formed. (Arrangement of game nails) guides the player in the direction of the tulip-type normal variable winning device 41 (lower starting port 35). At this time, if the lower start opening 35 is in a winning state (starting opening open state), the game ball can win in the lower starting opening 35, but the open door 52b is retracted into the game board surface and the large winning opening 50 If is open (the big winning door is open), the game ball is guided into the big winning door 50. In the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the player aims at the launch position on the special variable winning device 52 side (when the game ball is aimed so as to pass through the right flow path 3c), the upper start is performed. The game ball is difficult to be guided or is not guided to the mouth 34 side. Therefore, in the "large winning opening closed state", it is difficult or impossible to win a prize in each of the starting ports 34 and 35 unless the movable wing piece 47 of the normal variable winning device 41 operates.

When the above-mentioned winning means belongs to either the left or right flow path, that is, whether the game ball flowing down the left flow path 3b or the right flow path 3c can win a prize, the winning means belonging to the left flow path 3b. There are an upper starting port 34, a lower starting port 35, and general winning ports 43a to 43d on the left side, and winning means belonging to the right flow flow path 3c includes an upper starting port 34, a lower starting port 35, and a normal symbol starting port. There are 37, a large winning opening 50, and a general winning opening 43e on the right side. If the movable wing piece 47 is open (starting port is open), the lower starting port 35 belongs to both the left flow path 3b and the right flow path 3c, and a prize is awarded from either the left or right flow path. It is possible. However, since the operating condition of the movable wing piece 47 of the lower starting port 35 is the passage (winning) of the game ball through the normal symbol starting port 37 located on the right side of the game area 3a, the movable wing piece 47 is substantially right-flowing. It can be said that it belongs only to the route 3c. Further, the large winning opening 50 belongs only to the right flow path 3c, and only the game ball from the right flow path 3c can win a prize.

(Right-handed advantageous configuration under specific conditions)
In the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the game ball is "right-handed" aiming to pass through the right flow path 3c, the game ball is likely to win a prize in the normal symbol start port 37, but the upper start port. The game ball is difficult to be guided or is not guided to the 34 side. Therefore, in the "large winning opening closed state", it is difficult or impossible to win a prize in each of the starting ports 34 and 35 unless the movable wing piece 47 of the normal variable winning device 41 operates. However, when the "electric support state (electric support state)" described later occurs, the movable wing piece 47 operates in an opening / closing pattern that is at least more advantageous than the normal state (normal game state). Therefore, the game ball passes through the left flow path 3b instead of the "right hit" aiming at the game ball passing through the right flow path 3c under non-electric support (state without electric support described later). On the other hand, under the electric support state, "right-handed" is more advantageous than "left-handed". That is, depending on the game state, the game progress acts favorably or disadvantageously for the player depending on which of the left flow path 3b and the right flow path 3c the game ball flows down, and is either "left-handed" or "right". Which of the "hit" methods is advantageous for the player (the progress of the game is advantageous for the player) changes according to the game state, and is accompanied by a non-electric support state (for example). , "Left-handed" is advantageous in the normal state or latent state), and "Right-handed" is advantageous in the gaming state (for example, time saving state or probable change state) accompanied by the electric support state.

Each winning opening such as the upper starting opening 34, the lower starting opening 35, the normal symbol starting opening 37, the large winning opening 50, or the general winning opening 43a to 43e functions as a winning means arranged in the game area 3a. Further, detection of an upper start opening sensor 34a, a lower start opening sensor 35a, a normal symbol start opening sensor 37a, a large winning opening sensor 52a, or a general winning opening sensor 43h (corresponding to each of the general winning opening 43a to 43e). The switch (winning detection switch) functions as a winning detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the winning means. The number, shape, formation position, and the like of each of the above-mentioned winning means can be appropriately changed according to the playability. Further, for each winning means, whether the game ball flowing down the left flow path 3b and / or the right flow path 3c is difficult to win, cannot be won, or can be won is appropriately changed according to the playability. be able to.

When a game ball is won in each winning opening, the number of winning balls per winning ball promised for each winning opening is paid out from the game ball payout device 19 (see FIG. 3). For example, there are 3 upper start ports 34, 1 lower start port 35, 0 normal symbol start ports 37 (without prize balls), 15 large prize openings 50, and 3 general prize openings 43a to e. Will be paid out. The game balls that did not win in each of the above winning openings are discharged from the gaming area 3a through the out opening 49. Here, the "winning" is not a structure in which the winning opening takes in the game ball inside, or the winning opening takes in the game ball inside, but a winning opening consisting of a passing gate (for example, a normal symbol start opening 37). ), It means that the game ball passes through the gate, and when the game ball is actually detected by each winning detection switch formed for each winning opening, "winning" is made in the winning opening. Is treated as if it occurred. The game ball related to this winning is also referred to as a "winning ball".

<Movable body accessory>
Further, in the game area 3a, a plurality of movable body accessories are arranged at positions that do not interfere with the flow of the game ball. In the present embodiment, the first movable body accessory 80 is arranged on the upper right side of the center decorative body 48, and the second movable body accessory 90 is arranged on the diagonally lower right side thereof. The first movable body accessory 80 includes a clock face portion 81 composed of a number display unit in which numbers from the Roman numerals "I" to "XII" are assigned and divided into 12 number sectors, and a clock board portion 81 on the clock face portion 81. It has a clock hand 82 composed of a minute hand and a minute hand formed so as to be rotatable, and forms a "wall clock portion" as a whole. In this sense, the first movable body accessory 80 is also referred to as a "clock-type accessory". The clock face portion 81 has a full-color LED on the back side or inside for each sector division location indicated by the short hand, or the number sector itself is composed of the full-color LED, and each number sector is independently and independently of a different color. It has a structure that can emit light.

Further, in the second movable body accessory 90, a corolla composed of a plurality of petals is arranged around the flower center, and a calyx is further arranged around the outer side of the corolla to double the corolla, thereby forming a flower shape. The flower-shaped portion 91 (first movable body 91) is attached to the tip of the arm 92 (second movable body 92) capable of swinging, and is configured as a flower-shaped accessory 90 as a whole. The flower-shaped portion 91 has a plurality of petals that can rotate around the center of the flower. The flower-shaped accessory 90 is normally stationary at an original position (shown by a solid line in FIG. 2) defined on the edge inside the liquid crystal screen or on the side outside the liquid crystal screen, and when a predetermined operating condition is satisfied, the arm 92 Tilts and moves together with the arm 92 to a position where the flower-shaped portion 91 covers the liquid crystal screen (shown by a broken line in FIG. 2). Then, when moving to the effect position shown by the broken line in FIG. 2, the flower-shaped portion 91 rotates at the tip of the arm, and the translucent flower center and petal portion can be illuminated from behind by a lamp or a full-color LED to illuminate beautifully. .. When the flower-shaped accessory 90 finishes its operation, it returns from the effect position of the broken line to the origin position of the solid line. The flower-shaped portion 91 can have a plurality of types of motion patterns such as high-speed rotation, low-speed rotation, and reverse rotation as the petal rotation motion, and the arm 92 has a predetermined tilting motion in addition to the fully open tilting motion of tilting to the broken line portion. Multiple types of motion patterns are possible, such as a quasi-tilt motion that tilts to a tilt angle, a vibration motion in which the arm rattles, and a sizing motion. The clock-shaped accessory 80 (clock hand 82) and the flower-shaped accessory 90 (first movable body 91, second movable body 92) are used for advance notice production depending on the operation mode, and setting suggestions described later. It is also used when performing (appearing) the production.

<2. Control device: Fig. 3>
Next, with reference to FIG. 3, a control device for controlling the game operation of the game machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 3 is a control block diagram showing an outline of the control device.

The control device of the game machine 1 according to the present embodiment is a main control board (main control means) 20 (hereinafter, referred to as “main control unit 20”) that collectively controls control (game operation control) related to overall game operation. The effect control board (effect control means) 24 (hereinafter referred to as "effect control unit 24") that receives the effect control command from the main control unit 20 and controls the execution (appearance) of the effect by the effect means. ), A payout control board (payout control means) 29 that controls the payout of prize balls by the game ball payout device 19, and a power supply (including a backup power supply) required for each board of the game machine from an external power source. It is mainly composed of a power supply board (power supply control means (not shown)) to be supplied. A liquid crystal display device 36 as an image display device is connected to the effect control unit 24. The power supply route is omitted in FIG.

(2-1. Main control unit 20)
The main control unit 20 is equipped with a microprocessor having a CPU 201 (main control CPU), and is ROM 202 (main control) that stores various data necessary for game operation control in addition to a control program that describes a game operation control procedure. It is equipped with a ROM) and a RAM 203 (main control RAM) that functions as a work area and a buffer memory, and constitutes a microcomputer (Z80 system equivalent) as a whole.

Although not shown, the main control unit 20 applies interrupt signals to the CTC and CPU, which provide the Z80 system with a periodic interrupt, a fixed-period pulse output creation function (bit rate generator), and a time measurement function. Interrupt controller circuit that exerts interrupt enable / interrupt prohibition function such as timer interrupt, reset circuit that can detect power on / off or power failure, output system reset signal, and reset CPU, control program Watchdog timer (WDT) circuit that monitors the operation abnormality of, out-of-designated area travel prohibition (IAT) circuit that monitors whether the program is executed correctly within the preset address range, and a certain range of hardware It also has a counter circuit for generating random numbers (hard random numbers). At least the main control unit (main control board) 20 and the payout control board 29 receive a voltage drop signal (power supply abnormality signal) from a power supply board (not shown) to start a backup process prior to power interruption. The game operation before the power is cut off can be resumed after the power is restored (backup function).

The counter circuit includes a random number generation circuit that generates a random number and a sampling circuit that samples a random number value at a predetermined timing from the random number generation circuit, and acts as a 16-bit counter as a whole. By sending an instruction to the sampling circuit according to the processing state, the CPU 201 acquires the numerical value indicated by the random number generation circuit as an internal lottery random number value (big hit determination random number (random number size: 65536)). , The random number value is used for the big hit lottery. The random number for the internal lottery is obtained by adding the soft random number value generated by appropriate software processing and the hard random number value in order to prevent the hitting and the like.

Further, the main control unit 20 includes an upper start port sensor 34a for detecting a prize in the upper start port 34, a lower start port sensor 35a for detecting a prize in the lower start port 35, and a game ball for the normal symbol start port 37. The normal symbol start port sensor 37a for detecting the passage of the above, the large winning opening sensor 52a for detecting the winning of the large winning opening 50, and the general winning opening sensor 43h for detecting the winning of the general winning opening 43 are connected. The main control unit 20 can receive the detection signals from these. Based on the detection signals from these sensors, the main control unit 20 grasps which winning opening the game ball has won (winning).

Further, the main control unit 20 is connected to an OUT monitoring switch 49a that detects a game ball (so-called out ball) discharged from the game machine through the out port 49 and each winning port, and the main control unit 20 is an OUT monitoring switch. The detection signal from 49a can be received. The main control unit 20 includes a counting means for counting the number of out balls based on the detection signal from the OUT monitoring switch 49a, and the information on the number of out balls is used for calculating the base value (game record information) described later. Will be done.

Further, a fraud detection sensor (for example, vibration sensor, radio wave sensor, magnetic sensor: not shown) for detecting fraudulent activity against the game machine 1 is connected to the main control unit 20, and the main control unit 20 is connected to the fraud detection sensor. It is possible to monitor fraudulent activity against the game machine based on the detection signal of.

Further, the main control unit 20 includes a normal electric accessory solenoid 41c for controlling the opening and closing of the movable wing piece 47 of the lower starting port 35, and a large winning opening solenoid 52c for opening and closing the opening door 52b of the large winning opening 50. Is connected, and the main control unit 20 can transmit a control signal for driving and controlling them.

Further, the special symbol display device 38a and the special symbol display device 38b are connected to the main control unit 20, and the main control unit 20 can transmit a control signal for display control of the special symbols 1 and 2. There is. Further, a normal symbol display device 39a is connected to the main control unit 20, and a control signal for displaying and controlling the normal symbol can be transmitted.

Further, the main control unit 20 is connected to the composite display device 38c, the right-handed display device 39b, and the round number display device 39c, and the main control unit 20 is for displaying and controlling various information displayed on these devices. The control signal can be transmitted.

Further, a frame external terminal board 21 is connected to the main control unit 20, and the main control unit 20 transmits one or a plurality of outer end signals including specific game information via the frame external terminal board 21. It is possible to output to an external device such as a hall computer HC or a data counter (not shown) provided outside the machine. The game information included in the outer end signal includes, for example, winning game start / end information, winning information, fluctuation start / fluctuation stop information of a special symbol, prize ball number information, various security information (fraud detection information, RAM). Occurrence information such as clearing, opening the door, changing settings, etc.). In addition, the above-mentioned "hall computer HC" monitors and collects the game information of the game machine based on the game information included in the outer end signal, and comprehensively manages the operating status of the game machine installed in the pachinko hall. It is a management computer dedicated to pachinko parlors.

Further, the main control unit 20 includes a RAM clear switch 98 for initializing a predetermined area (memory in the area) of the RAM 203, and a setting key switch for switching to a setting change allowable state in which a setting value change operation described later can be performed. The 94, the setting change switch 95 for changing the setting value, and the setting change completion switch 96 for confirming the setting value selected by the setting change switch 95 are connected to the main control. The unit 20 can receive the detection signals from these switches.

In the case of this embodiment, the RAM clear switch 98, the setting change switch 95, and the setting change completion switch 96 are all push-button switches that can be operated by the operator. Further, the setting key switch 94 is a key switch that can be switched between a setting change allowable state (ON) and a setting change prohibition state (OFF) by inserting a setting key and performing an ON / OFF operation. It should be noted that these switches 95, 96, and 98 are formed in appropriate places inside the game machine from the viewpoint of preventing goto acts (illegal acts) such as an illegal change operation with respect to the set value, and unless the front frame 2 is opened, the game is played. ON / OFF operation from outside the machine is impossible.

Further, a setting display 97 (setting display means) for displaying information related to the set value is connected to the main control unit 20, and the main control unit 20 can transmit a control signal for displaying and controlling the setting display 97. .. The setting display 97 according to the present embodiment is composed of one 7-segment display and is mounted on the main control unit (main control board) 20. The setting display 97 is not limited to the main control board 20, but the payout control board 28, the launch control board 29, and the relay board (relay board for relaying the connection between various display devices, switches, etc., and the control board: FIG. It can be provided at an appropriate place inside the game machine, such as an effect control unit (effect control board (including a liquid crystal control board)) 24 (not shown).

(About set value)
The main control unit 20 is provided with a "setting change function" that can change the expected value (profit) of the profit given to the player such as the ball output rate (so-called machine discount, PAYOUT rate) in stages. The above "set value" is a value indicating this stage. This set value can be confirmed by the setting display 97, and is appropriately set by the hall clerk based exclusively on the sales strategy of the pachinko hall (game store).

The "set value" defines, for example, the lottery probability (winning probability) of a jackpot (a hit type in which the condition device described later is activated) for each stage. The higher the set value, the more the jackpot lottery probability (big hit). The winning probability) is set high, and it works in favor of the player. Such a set value can be provided with at least two stages (at least a first set value and a second set value). In this embodiment, six levels of setting values 1 to 6 are provided. For example, at low probability, setting 1 is 1/280, setting 2 is 1/275, and setting 3 is 1/270. 4 is 1/265, setting 5 is 1/260, setting 6 is 1/255, and so on. That is, the higher the set value, the easier it is to win a big hit (the higher the machine discount), which is advantageous to the player. As described above, the "set value" is a value that defines the events that affect the machine discount for each stage, and means a value for a grade related to the likelihood of a special event such as a big hit. That is, the jackpot lottery probability at the low probability and / or the jackpot lottery probability at the low probability can be configured to be different depending on the set value. When the jackpot lottery probability is in a high probability state (when the special symbol probability variation function described later is activated), the probability can be increased to a value not exceeding 10 times. However, the rate of increase may be the same or different for each set value. In the case of this embodiment, the rate of increase is the same for each set value. In the above example, if the jackpot lottery probability at low probability is set 1 to 6 = 1/280 to 1/255 and the rate of increase is 5 times, the jackpot lottery probability at high probability is set 1 to 6. = 1/56 to 1/51.

Further, when a plurality of types of jackpots are provided, the winning probability of one or a plurality of types of jackpots can be changed according to the set value. For example, when there are four types of jackpots 1 to 4, the higher the set value, the higher the probability of winning all of the jackpots 1 to 4, or some jackpots may be configured. Only a certain jackpot 1 to 3 may be configured to be high (in this case, the jackpot 4 has a common winning probability for all set values), or only a specific jackpot (for example, jackpot 1 only). ) May be configured to be high only (in this case, the winning probabilities common to all set values for jackpots 2 to 4). Further, the higher the set value is, the higher the total winning probability of the jackpots 1 to 4 may be. Further, the winning probability of the small hit type that does not trigger the operation of the conditional device may be changed according to the set value, as in the case of the large hit described above.

(About the operation to change the set value)
In the present embodiment, when the power is turned on, at least when the setting key switch 94 and the RAM clear switch 98 are in the ON state, the setting change is controlled to the allowable state, and when the power is turned on by any other switch operation, It is controlled to the setting change prohibition state. When the setting change switch 95 is turned ON in this setting change allowable state, the current display value of the setting display 97 is "1 → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 → 6 → 1 → 2 → 3 → ...". It is switched and displayed so as to circulate in the range of 1 to 6. Then, when the desired setting value is displayed, when the setting change completion switch 96 is turned ON (setting confirmation operation), the current display value is confirmed as the current setting value, and the setting value data is the predetermined area of the RAM 203 (the setting confirmation operation). It is stored in the set value storage area), and the predetermined area (memory in the area) of the RAM 203 is cleared. Then, when the setting key switch 94 is operated from the current ON state to the OFF state, the setting change allowable state is terminated, and thereafter, the game is started under the fixed set value. The main control unit 20 of the present embodiment has a set value selection means capable of selecting any set value from a plurality of set values having different advantages to the player, and a set value selected by the set value selection means. It is equipped with a setting value setting means for setting. In addition, it may be a "game machine without setting" which does not have the setting function as described above.

Further, the main control unit 20 can transmit various game processing information such as information about the special symbol variation display game and error information to the effect control unit 24 by the effect control command according to the processing state. .. However, in order to prevent a goto action from the outside, the main control unit 20 only transmits a signal to the effect control unit 24, and the signal from the effect control unit 24 cannot be received. It has become.

(About performance indicator 99)
Further, the main control unit 20 is connected to a performance display 99 (information display means) for notifying information (hereinafter referred to as "performance information") related to the game result of a predetermined period (specific game period), and is connected to the main control unit 20. 20 is capable of transmitting a control signal for displaying and controlling the display. The performance display 99 of the present embodiment is composed of a plurality of 7-segment LEDs, and specifically, four 7-segment LEDs (7-segment displays 99a to 99d) in which a display unit and a circuit unit are unitized are laterally arranged. This is mounted on the main control board 20, for example, to form a display capable of displaying a 4-digit number. Further, each 7-segment LED has a decimal point DP (dot) below the 7-segment number. The above "performance information" is information mainly used by pachinko hall stores and related agencies for confirmation and investigation, and for example, abnormalities in ball ejection performance occur due to illegal adjustment of game nails or goto acts. Information for investigating whether or not the original ball ejection performance of the gaming machine (designed ball ejection performance) is properly exhibited, in other words, "information on game performance (game performance information)". .. Therefore, the performance information itself is information that is not directly related to the game progress itself when the player plays the game, unlike the advance notice effect and the setting suggestion effect described later. Therefore, the performance display 99 is not installed in a place that is visible to the player, but is mounted in a place that is easily visible inside the game machine, for example, on a control board or a board case that protects the control board. Further, at least one of the four segments 99a to 99d of the performance indicator 99 may be configured to be usable as the setting indicator 97.

In the present embodiment, the total number of payouts (the number of payouts in the normal state) in the normal state (the jackpot lottery probability is low (normal probability) and there is no electric support described later) and the cumulative number of out balls in the normal state (normal). The number of outs during normal times) is measured in real time, and the value obtained by dividing the number of outs during normal times by the number of outs during normal times multiplied by 100 (base value calculated by multiplying the number of outs during normal times by the number of outs during normal times x 100) , The above-mentioned "performance information" is adopted, and this is displayed in a predetermined mode by the performance display 99. As for the base value, the value rounded to the first decimal place is displayed on the performance display 99. However, instead of simply measuring permanently and displaying the base value (performance information), when the number of out balls being measured reaches a predetermined specified number (for example, 60,000), the measurement is temporarily terminated. , The base value at the end of the measurement is stored in the RAM 203 as history information (the current base value is stored), and the measurement of the new base value is started again. In addition, in the case of this embodiment, the above-mentioned "specified number (60,000 pieces)" that triggers the end of measurement is not the number of outs in the normal state, but the cumulative number of outs measured during all game states (including during the winning game). The number of balls (number of outs in all states) is adopted, and this "number of outs in all states" is also measured in real time. The processing program related to the display control and the base value on the performance display 99 and its work area are defined in an area (out-of-area memory) different from the area (in-area memory) accessed by the CPU 201 during normal game progress. ing. Further, the performance information is not limited to the above-mentioned base value in the normal state, and is not particularly limited as long as it is useful game performance information.

A payout control board (payout control unit) 29 is connected to the main control unit 20, and the payout control board 29 is connected to a launch control board (launch control unit) 28 that controls the launch device 32 and a game ball. A game ball payout device (game ball payout means) 19 for performing the above is connected.

The main roles of the payout control board 29 are reception of a payout control command from the main control unit 20, prize ball payout control of the game ball payout device 19 based on the payout control command, and information on a payout operation state to the main control unit 20 ( Status signal) transmission, etc. When it is necessary to pay out the balls, the main control unit 20 can send a control command related to the payout (“payout control command” for specifying the number of prize balls) to the payout control board 29, while the main control unit 20 can send the payout control command. The payout control board 29 can transmit the above status signal to the main control unit 20.

The payout control board 29 has a full detection sensor 60 for detecting the stored state of the game balls stored in the upper tray 9 (whether or not the upper tray 9 is full), a front frame 2 and / or a front operation panel. A door opening sensor 61 (ON when opened / OFF when closed) for detecting the open / closed state of No. 7 is connected, and the payout control board 29 can receive detection signals from these sensors.

Further, the payout control board 29 is detected by a supply shortage detection sensor 19a for detecting a supply shortage of game balls, a ball counting sensor 19b for detecting a game ball (prize ball) to be paid out, and the like provided in the game ball payout device 19. It is possible to receive signals. Further, the payout control board 29 can transmit a control signal for controlling the payout motor 19c (the motor that drives the ball payout mechanism unit (not shown) for paying out the game ball) of the game ball payout device 19. ing.

The payout control board 29 indicates a full state based on detection signals from various sensors such as a fullness detection sensor 60, a door open sensor 61, a replenishment shortage detection sensor 19a, and a ball counting sensor 19b as the above state signals. "Signal", "Door open signal" indicating that the front frame 2 and front operation panel 7 are open, "Supply out signal" indicating insufficient supply of game balls, Abnormal payout of prize balls (insufficient payout, excessive payout) Various status signals such as a "counting error signal" indicating "counting error signal" and a "payout completion signal" indicating that the payout operation has been completed can be transmitted to the main control unit 20. Based on these status signals, the main control unit 20 determines whether the front frame 2 / front operation panel 7 is in the open state (door opening error) and whether the payout operation of the game ball payout device 19 is normal (whether the payout operation of the game ball payout device 19 is normal). (Prize ball error) and whether or not the upper saucer 9 is full (ball jam error) are monitored.

Further, a launch control board (launch control unit) 28 is connected to the payout control board 29, and a launch control signal (launch permission signal ES) can be transmitted to the launch control board 28. The launch control board 28 controls energization of a launch solenoid (not shown) provided in the launch device 32 based on the launch control signal, and realizes a game ball launch operation by operating the launch operation handle 15. .. Further, the launch strength of the game ball can be changed according to the operation amount of the launch operation handle 15.

(2-2. Production control unit 24)
The effect control unit 24 is equipped with a microprocessor having a CPU 241 (effect control CPU), a ROM 242 (effect control ROM) that stores the effect data required for the effect control process, and a RAM 243 (effect control ROM) that functions as a work area or a buffer memory. It is mainly composed of a microcomputer equipped with an effect control RAM), an acoustic control unit (sound source LSI), an RTC function unit (Real Time Clock), and a counter circuit (16 bits) for generating a fixed range of hard random numbers. Counter for 8 bits), interrupt controller circuit, reset circuit, WDT circuit, etc. are provided to control the overall production operation. In addition, the RTC function unit is a clock IC that keeps track of time, and relates to real-time time information and / or date (month, day, day of the week) such as the current time (“current time is hour, minute, second”). It works as a clock means to provide calendar information. Further, like the main control unit 20, it also has a backup function and soft random number generation means (for example, random number generation means for production lottery).

The main roles of the effect control unit 24 are receiving the effect control command from the main control unit 20, determining the selection of the effect based on the effect control command, controlling the image display of the liquid crystal display device 36, controlling the sound of the speaker 46, and various other types. Light emission control of the effect LED (decorative lamp 45, button LED 13b, other effect LED), operation control of various movable body accessories (clock type accessory 80, flower type accessory 90), and the like.

Further, the effect control unit 24 includes a display control unit (not shown) that controls the display of the liquid crystal display device 36. This display control unit is developed by a VDP that controls overall video output processing such as image development processing and image drawing, an image ROM that stores image data (effect image data) that the VDP performs image development processing, and a VDP. A VRAM (Video RAM) that temporarily stores the image data, a liquid crystal control CPU that outputs control data necessary for VDP to perform display control, and a program that describes the display control operation procedure of the liquid crystal control CPU and its It is mainly composed of a liquid crystal control ROM that stores various data necessary for display control and a liquid crystal control RAM that functions as a work area or a buffer memory.

Further, the effect control unit 24 displays light on the light display device 45a including various effect LEDs such as a decorative lamp 45 and a button LED 13b in order to execute an image display effect, a light effect, a sound effect, or a movable body effect. Movable accessory motors 80c, 91c that operate the acoustic control unit (sound source LSI) for the acoustic generator 46a including the control unit and the speaker 46, and the movable accessory (clock-shaped accessory 80, flower-shaped portion 91, arm 92). , 92c is provided with a drive control unit (motor drive circuit) and the like.

Further, the effect control unit 24 is connected to a position detection sensor 82a that monitors the movement of the movable body accessory, and the effect control unit 24 is based on the detection information from the position detection sensor 82a and the current operation of the movable body accessory. The operation mode is controlled while monitoring the position (for example, the amount of movement from the origin position). Further, the effect control unit 24 monitors the malfunction of the operation of the movable body accessory based on the detection information from the position detection sensor 82a, and if the malfunction occurs, performs a predetermined error notification process.

Further, the effect control unit 24 is connected to the effect button switch 13a for detecting the operation of the effect button 13 and the direction key switches 75a'to 75d' for detecting the operation of the direction keys 75 (75a to 75d) to control the effect. The unit 24 can receive operation detection signals from the effect buttons 13 and the direction keys 75.

When the effect control unit 24 receives the effect control command sent from the main control unit 20, the effect control unit 24 determines by lottery or uniquely from a plurality of types of effect patterns prepared in advance based on the information contained in the command. Then, various production means are controlled at the required timing to bring out the desired production. As a result, the display of the effect image by the liquid crystal display device 36 (image display effect), the reproduction of the sound from the speaker 46 (sound effect), and the lighting / blinking drive of the decorative lamp 45 and other effect LEDs (light effect) are realized. , Various effect patterns (variable display operation of decorative patterns, notice effect, etc.) are developed in chronological order to realize a "effect scenario" in a broad sense. Further, the effect control unit 24 responds to the effect button 13 and / or the direction key 75 based on the operation detection signals from the effect button switch 13a and the direction key switches 75a'to 75d' during the predetermined operation reception valid period. It is configured so that it can be identified whether such an operation has been performed (for example, pressing, long pressing, repeated hitting, pressing order of the direction key 75 in the up / down / left / right direction, etc.) (operation identification means), depending on the operation mode. It is configured so that the production can be executed and controlled.

The effect control command defines the function by a 2-byte configuration consisting of a 1-byte length mode (MODE) and a 1-byte length event (EVENT), and in order to distinguish between MODE and EVENT, Bit7 of MODE is used. Bit7 of ON and EVENT is OFF. When this information is transmitted as valid, a strobe signal is output corresponding to each of the mode (MODE) and the event (EVENT). That is, when there is a command to be transmitted, the CPU 201 (main control CPU) sets and outputs mode (MODE) information for transmitting the command to the effect control unit 24, and the first time after a predetermined time has elapsed from this setting. The strobe signal of is transmitted. Further, the event information is set and output after a lapse of a predetermined time from the transmission of the strobe signal, and the second strobe signal is transmitted after the lapse of a predetermined time from this setting. The strobe signal is controlled to be active by the CPU 201 for a predetermined period during which the CPU 241 (effect control CPU) can reliably receive the command.

Further, the effect control unit 24 (CPU241) generates an interrupt based on the input of the strobe signal, executes the control program for the command reception interrupt process, and acquires the effect control command in the interrupt process. It has become. Further, unlike the CPU 201, the CPU 241 is executing an interrupt process (a timer interrupt process that is periodically executed) based on another interrupt when an interrupt occurs based on the input of a strobe signal. Even if there is, the command reception interrupt process is performed by interrupting the process, and the command reception interrupt process is preferentially performed even if other interrupts occur at the same time.

<3. Overview of operation>
Next, a game operation related to the game machine 1 using the control device (FIG. 3) will be described.

(3-1. Symbol variation display game)
(3-1-1. Special symbol variation display game, decorative symbol variation display game)
In the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control unit 20 receives a predetermined starting condition, specifically, the game ball enters (wins) the upper start port 34 or the lower start port 35. A "big hit lottery" is held by random number lottery. Based on the lottery result, the main control unit 20 variablely displays the special symbols 1 and 2 on the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b to start the special symbol variable display game, and displays the result as a special symbol after a lapse of a predetermined time. Derived display is performed on the device, thereby ending the special symbol variation display game.

Here, in the present embodiment, the big hit lottery based on the winning of the upper starting port 34 and the big hit lottery based on the winning of the lower starting port 35 are performed separately and independently. Therefore, the jackpot lottery result for the upper starting port 34 is derived on the special symbol display device 38a side, and the jackpot lottery result for the lower starting port 35 is derived on the special symbol display device 38b side. Specifically, on the special symbol display device 38a side, the special symbol 1 is variablely displayed and the first special symbol variable display game is started on the condition that the game ball enters the upper start port 34. On the other hand, on the special symbol display device 38b side, the special symbol 2 is variablely displayed and the second special symbol variable display game is started on the condition that the game ball enters the lower starting port 35. ing. Then, when the special symbol variation display game on the special symbol display device 38a or the special symbol display device 38b is started, after a predetermined variation display time elapses, if the jackpot lottery result is a "big hit", a predetermined "big hit" In the mode, when the big hit lottery result is "small hit", the special symbol in the variable display is stopped and displayed in the predetermined "small hit" mode, and in other cases, in the predetermined "loss" mode. The game result (big hit lottery result) is derived by.

In the present specification, for convenience of explanation, the first special symbol variation display game on the special symbol display device 38a side is referred to as "special symbol variation display game 1", and the second special symbol display device 38b side is referred to as "special symbol variation display game 1". The special symbol variation display game of the above may be referred to as "special symbol variation display game 2". Further, unless otherwise required, "special symbol 1" and "special symbol 2" are simply referred to as "special symbol" (sometimes abbreviated as "special symbol"), and "special symbol variation display game 1" and "special symbol" It may be referred to as a "special symbol variation display game" without distinguishing it from the "special symbol variation display game 2".

Further, when the above-mentioned special symbol variation display game is started, the decorative symbol (directing game symbol) is variablely displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36, and the decorative symbol variation display game is started, which accompanies this. Then, various productions are developed. When the special symbol variation display game ends, the decorative symbol variation display game also ends, and the special symbol display device reflects a predetermined special symbol indicating the jackpot lottery result, and the liquid crystal display device 36 reflects the jackpot lottery result. The decorative design is derived and displayed. That is, the result of the special symbol variation display game is reflected and displayed by the dramatic decorative symbol variation display game including the variation display operation of the decorative symbol.

Therefore, for example, when the result of the special symbol variation display game (result of the jackpot lottery) is "big hit", the decorative symbol variation display game develops an effect that reflects the result. Then, in the special symbol display device, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a big hit (for example, the 7-segment display state is "7"), the liquid crystal display device 36 displays "left", "middle", and "right". In each display area of "", the decorative symbol reflects the "big hit" (hit symbol: for example, in each display area of "left", "middle", "right", three decorative symbols are "7" " 7 ”and“ 7 ”are displayed in the stop display mode).

In the case of this "big hit", specifically, the special symbol variation display game ends, and the decorative symbol variation display game ends accordingly, and as a result, the symbol mode of the "big hit" is derived and displayed. After that, the large winning opening solenoid 52c (see FIG. 3) of the special variable winning device 52 operates and the opening door 52b opens and closes in a predetermined pattern, whereby the large winning opening 50 is opened and closed, and the game is played more than in the normal state. A special game state (big hit game) that is advantageous to the player occurs. In this big hit game, the opening time of the big winning opening by the opening door 52b is until a predetermined time (maximum opening time: 29.8 seconds, for example) elapses, or the number of winning balls to the big winning opening 50 is the maximum number of winnings (maximum number of winning balls). The winning area is opened or expanded until the entrance is opened by one operation of the accessory or the maximum number of winning balls allowed for the expanded winning opening: (for example, 10) is reached. A "round game" such that the big winning opening is closed when any of the conditions is met (the condition for ending the round game (closing condition) is satisfied) is a predetermined number of rounds (for example, a maximum of 10 rounds). )Repeated.

When the above jackpot game starts, the opening effect is first performed using the start interval time (start INT), and when the start INT ends, a plurality of round games are performed up to a predetermined number of predetermined rounds (maximum number of rounds). It is done once. Then, when the maximum number of rounds is completed, the ending effect is performed using the end interval time (end INT), and a series of big hit games is completed. When the current round game is completed, the next round game is started via a predetermined interval time (integ between rounds). In addition, "in-round production" appears during the round game, and "inter-round INT production" appears during the round game (during the inter-round INT). That is, the jackpot game is roughly classified into each game period of the opening period (start INT period), the round game period up to the maximum number of rounds, and the ending period (end INT period).

Regarding the information necessary for executing the above-mentioned decorative symbol variation display game, first, the main control unit 20 first enters (wins) a game ball into the upper start port 34 or the lower start port 35, and specifically. , "Big hit", "Small hit", or "Loss" on condition that the game ball is detected by the upper start port sensor 34a or the lower start port sensor 35a and the start condition (start condition related to the special symbol) is satisfied. If it is a "big hit", the big hit type is selected, if it is a "small hit", the small hit type is selected, and if it is a "miss", the big hit type is selected. Perform a big hit lottery including'design lottery (winning type lottery)'to draw a lottery for the loss type (if there is only one type of big hit, small hit or loss, it is not necessary to perform the symbol lottery, so omit the lottery. Based on the lottery result information, the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol and the special symbol (special stop symbol) to be finally stopped and displayed are determined. Then, as an effect control command for specifying the processing state, the effect control unit 24 issues a "variation pattern designation command" including at least the variation pattern information of the special symbol (for example, the jackpot lottery result, the information regarding the variation time of the special symbol, etc.). Send to the side. As a result, the basic information required for the decorative symbol variation display game is sent to the effect control unit 24. In the present embodiment, in order to enrich the variation of the effect, a "decorative symbol designation command" including information on the special stop symbol (design lottery result information) is also transmitted to the effect control unit 24.

In addition to the jackpot lottery result, the variation pattern information of the special symbol may include information for designating the execution of a specific advance notice effect (for example, reach effect and pseudo-ream effect (including the number of pseudo-reams) described later). it can. Specifically, the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol is roughly classified into a "hit fluctuation pattern" in the case of a hit and a "loss fluctuation pattern" in the case of a loss, depending on the result of the big hit lottery. "Reach variation pattern" that specifies the execution of the reach effect (including the specification of the type of reach), "normal variation pattern" that does not specify the execution of the reach effect, and "pseudo-ream" that specifies the execution of the pseudo-ream effect and the reach effect. A plurality of types of fluctuation patterns are included, such as "with reach fluctuation pattern" and "pseudo-ream normal fluctuation pattern" in which execution of pseudo-continuous effect is specified and execution of reach effect is not specified. In addition, for the reach fluctuation pattern and the fluctuation pattern with pseudo-ream, the fluctuation time is basically set longer than the fluctuation time of the normal fluctuation pattern in order to secure the production time of the advance notice effect ( (See FIGS. 24 and 25).

The effect control unit 24 is time-series during the decorative symbol variation display game based on the information included in the effect control commands (here, the variation pattern designation command and the decorative symbol designation command) sent from the main control unit 20. The content of the effect (effect scenario) to be developed in the game, the decorative symbol to be finally stopped and displayed (decorative stop symbol), etc. are decided, and according to the time schedule based on the variable pattern of the special symbol, the notice effect during the decorative symbol variable display game and Controls the variable display effect of decorative patterns. As a result, the decorative symbol by the liquid crystal display device 36 is variablely displayed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol by the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b, and the period of the special symbol variable display game and the decorative symbol variable display game are in progress. The period of is substantially the same time width. Further, the effect control unit 24 controls the liquid crystal display device 36, the light display device 45a, or the sound generator 46a, respectively, so as to correspond to the effect scenario, and develops various effects in the decorative symbol variation display game. As a result, the reproduction of the image (image effect) on the liquid crystal display device 36, the reproduction of the sound effect (sound effect), and the lighting / blinking drive (light effect) of the effect LED such as the decorative lamp 45 are realized.

In this way, the special symbol variation display game and the decorative symbol variation display game have an inseparable relationship, and what reflects the display result of the special symbol variation display game is expressed in the decorative symbol variation display game. , These two symbol variation display games may be regarded as equivalent symbol games. Unless otherwise specified in the present specification, the above two symbol variation display games may be simply referred to as "symbol variation display games". In addition, the number of executions (number of games) of the symbol variation display game (particularly, the special symbol variation display game) is set to "number of symbol variation" or "number of variation" or "○○ rotation (for example, one rotation)" for convenience of explanation. (10 rotations, etc.) ”.

(3-1-2. Ordinary symbol fluctuation display game)
Further, in the game machine 1, based on the fact that the game ball has passed (winning) through the normal symbol start port 37, the main control unit 20 performs a "subsidy winning lottery" by a random number lottery. Based on this lottery result, the normal symbol represented by the LED is variablely displayed on the normal symbol display device 39a to start the normal symbol variable display game, and after a predetermined fluctuation time elapses, the result is turned on and off by the LED. It is designed to stop and display in combination. For example, when the result of the normal symbol variation display game is "auxiliary hit", the display unit of the normal symbol display device 39a is stopped and displayed in a specific lighting state (for example, all two LEDs 39 are in the lighting state).

In the case of this "auxiliary hit", the normal electric accessory solenoid 41c (see FIG. 3) is activated, whereby the movable wing piece 47 opens in an inverted "C" shape and the lower starting port 35 opens. Alternatively, the game ball is expanded to a state in which the game ball can easily flow in (starting opening open state), and an auxiliary game state (hereinafter referred to as "solenoid open game") that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state occurs. In this general electric opening game, the movable wing piece 47 of the normal variable winning device 41 operates (opens), and the opening time of the lower starting port 35 (starting opening open state time) is the maximum opening time (for example, maximum 6 seconds). ) Elapsed, or until the number of winning balls to the lower starting port 35 reaches a predetermined number (for example, a maximum of 10), the winning area is controlled to be open or expanded, and one of these conditions is satisfied. In that case, the opening operation of the movable wing piece 47 is completed and the lower starting port 35 is closed. The lower starting port 35 can be opened one or more times within the maximum opening time.

(3-1-3. Operation hold ball)
In the present embodiment, each start port 34, 35 or the normal symbol start port 37 wins a prize during the symbol variation display game, the normal symbol variation display game, the big hit game, the small hit game, or the normal electric open game. When it occurs, that is, when there is an input of a detection signal from the upper start port sensor 34a, the lower start port sensor 35a, or the normal symbol start port sensor 37a and the corresponding start condition is satisfied, this is used as the start right of the variable display game. As such data, except for those related to the variable display, the maximum number of reserved storages, which is a predetermined upper limit, is retained and stored. The pending data that is not used for this symbol variation display operation or the game ball related to the reserved data is also referred to as an "operation pending ball". In order to clarify the number of operation holding balls to the player, a dedicated holding display (not shown) provided at an appropriate position in the game machine 1 or a holding display provided as an icon image on the screen by the liquid crystal display device 36. Turn on the device (see FIG. 5A).

Further, in the present embodiment, up to four operation holding balls related to the special symbol 1, the special symbol 2, and the ordinary symbol are reserved and stored in the corresponding storage area of the RAM 203, and are retained as the number of times the fluctuation of the special symbol or the ordinary symbol is confirmed. The maximum number of stored balls (maximum number of reserved balls) for each of the special symbol 1, the special symbol 2, and the normal symbol is not particularly limited. Further, all or part of the maximum number of reserved memories of each symbol may be different, and the number can be appropriately determined according to the playability. In the present specification, for convenience of explanation, each operation holding ball of the special symbol 1, the special symbol 2, and the normal symbol is referred to as "special figure 1 operation holding ball", "special figure 2 operation holding ball", and "special figure 2 operation holding ball", respectively. It is also called "Public figure operation hold ball".

(3-2. Game state)
Next, the gaming state will be described. The gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment is configured to be capable of generating a plurality of types of gaming states in addition to the above-mentioned jackpot which is a special gaming state. In order to facilitate the understanding of the present invention, first, functions (means) related to the occurrence of various gaming states will be described.

The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is provided with a "probability variation function (probability variation function)" in which the main control unit 20 (CPU201) is responsible for the functional unit. There are two types of this, a probabilistic function related to a special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "special symbol probabilistic function") and a probabilistic function related to a normal symbol (hereinafter referred to as "ordinary symbol probabilistic function").

The special symbol probability change function is a function that changes the jackpot lottery probability from a low probability of a predetermined probability (normal probability) to a high probability to generate a "high probability state (big hit high probability state)" that is more advantageous than the normal state. .. Under the gaming state (high probability state) in which this special symbol probability change function is operating, the jackpot lottery probability is high, so that a jackpot is likely to occur. As described above, in the case of the present embodiment, the jackpot lottery probabilities at the time of low probability and at the time of high probability differ depending on the set value (see FIG. 4).

The normal symbol probability change function changes the lottery probability per auxiliary from a low probability (normal probability) to a high probability (for example, changes from 1/256 to 255/256), which is more advantageous than the normal state. It is a function to generate a "probability change state per auxiliary". Under the game state (auxiliary hit probability change state) in which this normal symbol probability change function is operating, the auxiliary hit lottery probability becomes a high probability state, so that auxiliary hits are likely to occur, and the public electric open game frequently occurs. , The operation rate is improved, in which the operation rate of the movable wing piece 47 per unit time is improved as compared with the normal state.

Further, the game machine 1 of the present embodiment is provided with a "variation time shortening function (time saving function)" in which the main control unit 20 is responsible for its functional unit. There are two types of this: a time saving function related to a special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "special symbol time saving function") and a time saving function related to a normal symbol (hereinafter referred to as "ordinary symbol time saving function").

The special symbol time reduction function generates a "special symbol time reduction state" that shortens the average time required for one special symbol fluctuation display game (the average time from when the special symbol starts to change to when it is stopped and displayed). It is a function to make it. Under the gaming state (special symbol time saving state) in which this special symbol time saving function is operating, the average fluctuation time of the special symbol in one special symbol fluctuation display game is shortened (for example, the average required for the reachless loss fluctuation). The time is shortened from 8 seconds to 2 seconds), and the number of big hit lottery per unit time is improved as compared with the normal state.

The normal symbol time saving function generates a "normal symbol time saving state" that shortens the average time required for one normal symbol fluctuation display game (the average time from when the normal symbol starts to change to when it is stopped and displayed). It is a function to make it. Under the gaming state (normal symbol time saving state) in which the normal symbol time saving function is activated, the average fluctuation time of the normal symbol in one normal symbol variation display game is shortened (for example, from 20 seconds to 0.6 seconds). (Shortened), the number of lottery times per unit time is improved compared to the normal state.

Further, the game machine 1 of the present embodiment has an "open extension function" in which the main control unit 20 is responsible for its functional unit. This open extension function is a function of generating an "open extension state" in which the open operation period (opening time of the movable wing piece 47) of the movable wing piece 47 of the normal variable winning device 41 is extended from the normal state. Under the open extension state, the open operation period (starting port open state time) of the movable wing piece 47 is extended from, for example, 0.2 seconds to 1.6 seconds, and the number of times of opening and closing is, for example, once (open extension function). Is extended from (when is not operating) to twice (when the open extension function is operating), and the operating rate is improved, in which the operating rate of the movable wing piece 47 per unit time is improved as compared with the normal state. Therefore, when the open extension function is activated, the frequency of winning the lower starting port 35 increases. Therefore, as a game state, the frequency of establishment of the starting condition of the special symbol variation display game for deriving the lottery result of the big hit is higher than the normal state. Compared to the state in which the opening extension function is not activated (non-operating), the gaming state is advantageous for the player. In this respect, the open extension state is also referred to as an "electric chew support state (electric support state)".

By operating one or a plurality of types of each of the above functions, it is possible to change the internal gaming state (internal gaming state) of the gaming machine. In the following, for convenience of explanation, the gaming state in which the special symbol probability change function, the special symbol time saving function, the normal symbol probability change function, the normal symbol time reduction function, and the open extension function are activated is referred to as a "probability change state", and among these functions, The game state in which the special symbol probability change function is removed is referred to as a "time saving state", and at least the game state in which the special symbol probability change function is activated and the open extension function is not activated (in the present embodiment, only the special symbol probability change function is activated). ) Is referred to as a "latent state", and a state in which all functions are not operating (non-operating) is referred to as a "normal state". Therefore, paying attention to the jackpot lottery probability in these gaming states, when the gaming state is the "time saving state" or the "normal state", the jackpot lottery probability becomes the "low probability state (normal probability)" and the gaming state becomes. In the case of "latent state" or "probability change state", the jackpot lottery probability is "high probability state". During the big hit related to the operation of the condition device, a hit game in which the big winning opening is opened and closed occurs, but all the functions are not activated for each of the above functions, and basically the same game state as the above normal state. It is placed below, and the variable display of the special symbol is interrupted.

(High base game state)
In the present embodiment, the above-mentioned functions related to the normal symbol, that is, the normal symbol probability change function, the normal symbol time saving function, and the open extension function, operate at the same trigger. However, when the above-mentioned ordinary symbol probability change function, the ordinary symbol time saving function, and the open extension function are individually focused on, when at least one of these functions is activated, the operation rate of the movable wing piece 47 is improved. Since the rate is improved and the frequency of winning the lower start port 35 increases (it becomes easier to win), as a game state, the frequency of establishment of the start condition of the special symbol variation display game for deriving the lottery result of the big hit or the payout of balls The rate (base) becomes higher than the normal state in the "high base game state (starting port entry advantageous state)". The "high base game state" here refers to a game state when a function related to a normal symbol (at least one function of a normal symbol probability change function, a normal symbol time saving function, and an open extension function) is activated, and is a special symbol. It is different from the game state when at least one of the special symbol probability change function and the special symbol time saving function is activated.

On the other hand, when focusing on the functions related to the special symbol (special symbol probability change function and special symbol time saving function) individually, when the above special symbol probability change function is activated, the jackpot lottery probability becomes higher than the normal state, resulting in a "high probability state". When the above-mentioned special symbol time saving function is activated, the special symbol time saving state is set in which the digestion time of the special symbol variation display game is shorter than the normal state. In this respect, it is distinguished from the above-mentioned "high-base game state" in which the frequency of establishment of the start condition of the special symbol variation display game is higher than that in the normal state.

In the present embodiment, as an example of the above-mentioned "high-base gaming state", at least the electric chew support state to which the open extension function is provided is treated as the "high-base gaming state". Under this electric chew support state, the operating rate (opening time and number of times of opening) of the movable wing piece 47 of the normal variable winning device 41 is improved, the winning rate to the lower starting port 35 is increased, and the winning frequency per unit time is increased. Since it rises, it becomes an advantageous gaming state for the player as compared with the case where it is not in the electric chew support state (low base gaming state). Focusing on the presence or absence of this electric chew support state, when the game state is "normal state" or "latent state", it becomes "no electric chew support state", and the game state is "time saving state" or "probability change state". If it is, it means that there is an electric chew support state. In the present specification, "without electric chew support state" is referred to as "state without electric support" or "state without electric support", and "with electric chew support state" is referred to as "state with electric support" or "state with electric support". It is called.

(3-2-1. Internal game state (game state determination number YJ): FIG. 20)
Regarding the operating status of each of the above functions (special symbol probability change function, special symbol time saving function, normal symbol probability change function, normal symbol time reduction function, and open extension function) that determine the game state, the main control unit 20 side has these functions. The operation (5AH) / non-operation (00H) is managed by the ON / OFF state of the corresponding flag. A gaming state focusing on the operating status of each of these functions is also referred to as an "internal gaming state". What kind of internal gaming state is currently managed is managed by using an identifier of "gaming status determination number YJ". For example, when the game state determination number YJ is "00H", "normal state (normal)" is specified, when "01H", "probability change state (probability change)" is specified, and when "02H", "time reduction" is specified. Specify the "state (time saving)", and in the case of "03H", specify the "latent state (latent)".

(3-2-2. Fluctuation pattern distribution designation number Tcode: Fig. 20)
Here, in the present embodiment, in order to realize various effects related to the above-mentioned internal gaming state, one internal gaming state can be further classified and managed. For example, when it is desired to divide the probabilistic state into a plurality of types of probabilistic states such as "probability change A" and "probability change B", these can be managed as different probabilistic states by using an identifier called "variation pattern distribution designation number Tcode". It has a simple structure. That is, the variable pattern distribution designation number Tcode identifies the internal gaming state itself like the gaming state determination number (YJ) in that it is data that can identify a plurality of gaming states that are subdivided from a certain internal gaming state. Different from possible data. The substance of the fluctuation pattern distribution designation number Tcode is an identifier (variation pattern selection mode) used when selecting a "variation pattern distribution table" (see FIGS. 24 to 25 described later) corresponding to the current gaming state. Data that identifies). Therefore, for example, the probability variation state (game state determination number YJ = 01H) is divided into "probability variation A" and "probability variation B", that is, as the variation pattern distribution designation number Tcode corresponding to the probability variation state (YJ = 01H). By defining "01H (probability variation A)" and "02H (probability variation B)", it is possible to select different variation pattern distribution tables for probability variation A and probability variation B.

Although the details will be described later, the above-mentioned "variation pattern distribution table" is used when determining the variation pattern of the special symbol related to the symbol variation display game, and one or a plurality of types of variation patterns (special symbol). (Fluctuation pattern) is determined in association with at least the current game state (variation pattern distribution designation number Tcode) and the jackpot lottery result (see FIGS. 23 to 25 described later).

Therefore, the operating status of each function (special symbol probability change function, special symbol time saving function, normal symbol probability change function, normal symbol time reduction function, and open extension function) related to determination of jackpot lottery probability and presence / absence of electric support, that is, "internal game" When focusing on the "state", for example, the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol is the same "probability change state", but the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the different fluctuation pattern distribution designation number Tcode called "probability change A" or "probability change B". Can be selected, and an effect related to the variable pattern distribution designation number Tcode can be executed. In this way, the "internal game state" when focusing on each function related to determining the jackpot lottery probability and the presence or absence of electric support, and the "variable pattern distribution" focusing on the determination of the variation pattern of the special symbol (determination of the production). By managing the "designated number Tcode" as different, even under the same internal gaming state, different fluctuation patterns are distributed. Fluctuation patterns corresponding to the designated number Tcode (probability variation A or probability variation B in the above example). Can be selected. As a result, even under the same internal gaming state, it is possible to bring about a large change in the digestion time (variation time of the special symbol) of the symbol variation display game and the related effects, and under the same internal gaming state. The degree of freedom of the production is improved, and the variation of the production can be enriched.

In the case of the present embodiment, as shown in the columns “Tcode” and “YJ” in FIG. 20, none of the internal gaming states is classified into a plurality of gaming states, but the variable pattern distribution designation number Tcode. The fluctuation pattern (variation pattern distribution table) may be selectably configured by focusing on, or the fluctuation pattern (variation pattern distribution table) may be selectably configured by focusing on the internal gaming state (YJ). May be good. In any case, the configuration is such that a variation pattern (variation pattern distribution table) according to the gaming state can be selected. In the present specification, for convenience of explanation, unless otherwise specified, the game state (variation pattern selection mode (Tcode)) when the internal gaming state (YJ) and the determination of the variation pattern of the special symbol (determination of the effect) are focused on. )) May be simply referred to as "gaming state" without distinguishing it from.

<4. About hit>
Next, with reference to FIG. 4, the “hit” according to the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram provided for explaining a hit type, a hit game operation mode, and a transition destination game state (transition destination game mode) after the hit game.

(4-1. About hit type)
In the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, as the winning type (hit type) of the big hit lottery target, as shown in the figure, "10R probable big hit", "4R probable big hit", "4R time saving big hit (4R non-probable big hit)" Multiple types of hits are included. These hits belong to the "big hit type" that triggers the operation of the conditional device, and are different from the hits (small hits) that belong to the so-called "small hit type" that does not trigger the operation of the conditional device. Here, the "condition device" is a device whose operation is a condition necessary for operating a accessory continuous operation device (a device for continuously operating a special electric accessory) for performing a round game, and is specified. The combination of the special symbols of is displayed, or the game ball operates when it passes through a specific area in the big winning opening (excluding the one that won the big winning opening while the accessory continuous operating device is operating). .. In addition, the operation of the accessory continuous operation device is a condition for causing an electric support state (open extension function operation) and probability fluctuation (shifting from one internal gaming state to another internal gaming state). ..

Therefore, when the "small hit" is won, the condition device does not operate and the accessory continuous operation device does not operate, so that the internal gaming state does not shift. Specifically, the transition control of the internal gaming state due to the small hit winning is not performed, but the transition control of the variable pattern distribution designation number Tcode can be performed. In addition, in the hit game by the small hit (small hit game), the round game like the big hit is not executed because the accessory continuous operation device does not operate, but it looks like it depends on how the opening / closing pattern of the big winning opening is determined. It is possible to realize a "pseudo round game" that behaves as if the round game is being executed. The operation mode of the small hit game is basically the same as that of the big hit game except that the round game is not executed, and after the lapse of a predetermined start INT, the "open / close operation game" that opens the large winning opening is executed. Then, when the opening / closing operation game is completed, a series of small hit games are completed after a predetermined end INT. Such a small hit is a winning type that triggers a transition (execution trigger) of a hit game (special game state) that involves opening and closing of the big winning opening, similar to a big hit, and is simply a "loss" property. To be different. Although the "small hit" is not provided in this embodiment, one or a plurality of types of small hits may be provided for the lottery target on the special figure 1 side and / or the special figure 2 side in consideration of game playability and the like. it can.

(4-2. About hit game)
Next, the content of the winning game by each of the above-mentioned hits will be described.

In "10R Probability Change Big Hit", the maximum number of rounds is 10 rounds, and the maximum opening time of the big winning opening in one round game may reach the maximum number of winnings (10). It is a big hit set to a sufficiently promising "long opening time (for example, 29.8 seconds)". In addition, for "4R probability variation jackpot" and "4R time reduction jackpot", the maximum number of rounds is set to 4, and the maximum opening time of the big winning opening in one round game is the same "long opening time" as the 10R probability variation jackpot. It is a big hit to be set. The profit status (profit degree) during the jackpot game becomes higher as the maximum number of rounds is relatively larger, and the maximum opening time of the jackpot becomes higher as the maximum opening time becomes longer. In the case of the present embodiment, since the maximum opening time for each jackpot is the same, the larger the maximum number of rounds, the higher the profit state during the jackpot game. Further, when paying attention to the symbol lottery rate shown in FIG. 4, the selection rate of the 10R probability variation jackpot is higher on the special figure 2 side (lower starting port 35 side) than on the special figure 1 side (upper starting port 34 side). Therefore, it is more advantageous to receive the lottery on the special figure 2 side. It is up to you to decide what kind of opening pattern the opening pattern of the big winning opening related to the round game should be.

(4-3. About the transition destination game state after the hit game)
Next, with reference to FIG. 4, a game state that is transferred after each of the above-mentioned big hit games is completed will be described. In the column of "game state at the time of winning / transition destination game state" shown in FIG. 4, the game state at the time of winning and the game state to be transferred after the winning game (transition destination game state) are shown according to the hit type. The relationship is shown.

(If you win the 10R probability variation jackpot)
In the case of "10R probability variation jackpot" or "4R probability variation jackpot", regardless of the game state at the time of winning the hit, the game shifts to the "probability variation state" after the jackpot game. In the case of this "probability change state", it is possible to continue until the number of executions of the special symbol variation display game (number of symbol variation) ends the predetermined specified number of times, or until the jackpot is won within the predetermined specified number of times. Then, when the special symbol variation display game ends without winning the jackpot within the specified number of times, the probability change state ends and the game shifts to the normal state from the next game. Whether or not the specified number of times has been reached is determined by counting the number of executions of the special symbol variation display games 1 and 2 (the number of fluctuations of the special figures 1 and 2) (the same applies to the time saving state described later). )). That is, the probability change state is terminated when the total number of executions of the special symbol variation display games 1 and 2 (total number of fluctuations of the special figures 1 and 2) is completed by the specified number of times without a big hit.

In the present embodiment, after shifting to a gaming state in which the jackpot lottery probability is at least high, a special symbol variation display is performed without winning a jackpot (excluding "small hits" that do not trigger a transition to the internal gaming state). When the game is completed a predetermined number of times, the high probability state is terminated and the jackpot lottery probability is shifted to a low probability, which is a "finite probability variation type" "number-cut probability variation machine (ST machine)". Hereinafter, if necessary, the upper limit number of times of the special symbol variation display game (number of fluctuations of the special symbol) in which this high probability state is continued is referred to as "ST number of times". In the case of this embodiment, the number of STs is set to 65536 times (see the remarks column in FIG. 4), and due to the jackpot lottery probability, the probability variation state is substantially guaranteed until the next jackpot is won. It is a "general probability change machine" belonging to. Whether the number of STs is infinite or finite can be appropriately determined according to the playability.

(If you win the 4R time saving jackpot)
In the case of "4R time saving big hit", regardless of the game state at the time of winning the hit, after the big hit game, it shifts to the "time saving state". When the time is reduced, the number of times the special symbol variation display game is executed continues until the specified number of times is completed, and a big hit is made within the specified number of times (excluding small hits that do not trigger the transition to the internal gaming state). ), When the special symbol variation display game ends, the time saving state ends and the game shifts to the normal state from the next game. In the case of this embodiment, the specified number of times related to the time saving state is "100 times" (see the remarks column in FIG. 4). The number of time reductions can be appropriately determined according to the playability.

(About loss type)
Further, as shown in the remarks column of FIG. 4, in the present embodiment, a plurality of types of loss types A, B, and C having different symbol lottery rates are provided. In the present embodiment, the symbol lottery probability of the loss A is set to be higher than that of other losses (loss B or loss C). In the case of this embodiment, the relationship satisfies "Loss A> Loss B> Loss C". For example, Loss A is 95%, Loss B is 4%, and Loss C is 1%.

<5. About production>
(5-1. Production mode)
Next, the effect mode (effect state) will be described. In the present embodiment, a plurality of types of effect modes for producing effects related to the game state are provided, and the transition control between each effect mode is possible in response to the transition (update) of the game state. The effect modes include "normal effect mode" related to "normal state", "probability effect mode" related to probabilistic state, "time saving effect mode" related to time saving state, and "hit middle effect" related to hit game. There are multiple types of production modes such as "mode" according to each game state. In addition, in each effect mode, a background display (background effect) is provided as the background of the variable display screen of the decorative pattern so that the player can grasp what kind of game state the player is staying in in the effect mode. , It is changed to the production mode related to the game state. For example, under the "normal production mode", a background effect reminiscent of the season'spring'(for example, a background effect that displays a background image of a cherry tree: the first background effect), and under the'short-time production mode', the season'summer A background effect reminiscent of'autumn'(for example, a background effect that displays a background image of the sea: a second background effect), and a background effect reminiscent of the season'autumn' under the'probability effect mode'(for example, a tree of autumn leaves). The background effect of displaying the background image of the above: the third background effect) can be changed to indicate the gaming state during the stay. Not only the background display is changed, but also the BGM, the decorative pattern (picture), and the like can be changed to the effect mode related to the game state. It should be noted that at least one production mode includes a plurality of types of "production stages", and it is possible to shift between these production stages. This effect stage is an aspect of the effect mode that produces an effect related to the gaming state, like the effect mode. For example, in the normal state, the cherry tree background image is displayed in the cherry blossom stage (directing stage A), the rape blossom background image is displayed in the rape blossom stage (directing stage B), and the background image of Gamo is displayed. There are "Gama Koei Stage (Direction Stage C)" etc., and the production according to each production stage appears. It can be said that these production stages A to C are production modes belonging to the normal production mode.

The effect control unit 24 (CPU 241) is configured to be capable of transition control between each effect mode according to the transition (update) of the game state, and is a functional unit (effect state transition control means) for transition control between a plurality of types of effect modes. ). Among the effect control commands sent from the main control unit 20 (CPU201), the effect control unit 24 specifies an effect control command including information on the game state, specifically, the current game state, or the game state. The game state (internal game state (YJ) and / or fluctuation pattern distribution designation number Tcode) is grasped based on the information included in the specific effect control command that specifies that the main control unit 20 is to be transferred. The effect mode is managed in a form that is consistent with the game state on the side, and the transition from one effect mode to another effect mode can be controlled according to the processing state. The above-mentioned "specific effect control command" includes, for example, a variation pattern specification command, a game state specification command, and a specific command transmitted during a hit (for example, a big hit start command or a big hit end command). If the effect control unit 24 can independently determine the game state, the effect mode transition control can be performed regardless of the specific effect control command.

(5-2. Notice production)
Next, the notice production will be described. The effect control unit 24 is the content of the effect control command from the main control unit 20, specifically, the variation pattern information included in at least the variation pattern designation command (in the present embodiment, the variation pattern designation command and / or the decorative symbol designation). Based on the information included in the command, the winning command described later, etc.), at least various "notice effects" related to the jackpot lottery result can be executed. Specifically, it is configured so that at least the above-mentioned effect mode (including the effect stage described later) and the "notice effect" related to the big hit lottery result (at least the winning lottery result) can be executed. The main role of the advance notice effect is to suggest (notice) the degree of expectation (prediction degree of winning) whether or not the winning type is won, and to suggest the occurrence of a specific advance notice effect. Most of the advance notice productions work as "fanning effects" to fuel the player's expectation of winning. Typical advance notice effects include "reach effect", "pseudo-continuous effect", "player participation type effect", "step-up effect", "stage change effect", and "look-ahead advance notice effect".

(5-2-1. Reach production)
The above-mentioned "reach effect" refers to an effect mode accompanied by a reach state (variable display mode accompanied by a reach state), and specifically, an effect mode in which a game result is derived and displayed via the reach state. The "reach state" means that a part of the decorative symbols derived and displayed in the middle of the decorative symbol variation display game is a big hit (big hit winning) in the stage before the result of the decorative symbol variation display game is derived. It is a display mode in which a variable display of a decorative symbol that has not yet been derived and displayed is performed while forming a part of the display mode, and a big hit is generated by using the variable display mode of the decorative design. It is a variable display mode that suggests that the display mode shown is easy to be derived (there is a possibility of winning a big hit) and allows the player to expect a big hit. For example, when the combination of decorative symbols (big hit symbol) indicating the jackpot winning (big hit occurrence) is a set of symbols such as "7 (left symbol)", "7 (middle symbol)", and "7 (right symbol)", it is predetermined. On the hit effective line, a part of the decorative symbol is a part of the symbol alignment. The left symbol and the right symbol display "7" (so-called tempai state), and the middle symbol (remaining that does not constitute the tempai state). The symbol) is in a state of performing fluctuation display while performing high-speed fluctuation, frame advance, swing, enlargement / reduction, deformation, and the like. Therefore, even if the reach state is formed, the result of the decorative symbol variation display game does not necessarily become a "big hit", and the finally derived result is not a stop display mode (big hit symbol) indicating a jackpot. In that case, the result of this game will be "missing". In the above example, the left symbol and the right symbol constituting the tempai state (reach symbol) are symbols constituting the reach state and are also referred to as “reach constituent symbols”. In addition, the timing of reaching the reach state is also referred to as reach timing or tempai timing.

The above-mentioned "reach effect" includes a plurality of types of reach effects associated with the winning expectation. For example, when a specific reach effect appears, the winning expectation is relatively higher than when a normal reach effect (normal reach (N reach)) appears. Such a specific reach production is called'super reach (SP reach)'. Many of these "SP reach" have a relatively longer production time (variable time) than N reach in order to fuel the expectation of winning a big hit. In the present embodiment, the reach of the SP reach system is roughly classified into "SP reach", "SP reach + SPSP reach", "SPSP reach" and the like.
(R1) "N reach" notifies the game result (hit or miss (information related to the big hit lottery result)) without SP reach only by passing through the normal reach state after the normal fluctuation. It is a variation mode when the game ends, and it is a reach production with the lowest expectation of winning. N reach includes N reach 1 and N reach 2 with different expectations for winning.
(R2) "SP reach (normal SP reach)" is a variation mode in which the first reach effect (SP reach) is generated via the normal reach, and then the game result is notified and the game ends.
(R3) In "SP reach + SPSP reach", after a normal fluctuation, a first reach effect (SP reach) occurs via a normal reach state, and once a loss is notified, the first reach effect is higher than the above first reach effect. This is a variable mode in which a second reach effect (SPSP reach) with a high expectation of winning occurs (developed into another SP reach system) and the game result is notified and ended, and is also referred to as "developed SPSP reach".
(R4) "SPSP reach" normally goes through the normal reach state after fluctuating, but does not go through the first reach effect (SP reach), that is, is omitted, and immediately the second reach effect (SPSP reach). Is generated (directly developed into SPSP reach), and it is a variation mode when the game result is notified and ended, and is also referred to as "direct hit type SPSP reach".

The degree of expectation of winning in the reach production changes mainly according to the high or low selection rate of the reach production. For example, the selection rate in relation to the jackpot lottery result so that there is a relationship of winning expectation of "N reach 1 <reach N2 <SP reach <developed SPSP reach <direct hit type SPSP reach" between the normal reach. Is stipulated. Also, for example, the relationship between the reach during the probability change is "Probability change reach A <Probability change reach B <Probability change middle reach C", and the relationship between the reach during the time reduction is "Time reduction medium reach A <Time reduction medium reach B". The selection rate is set in relation to the jackpot lottery result so that the winning expectation is related. The actual winning expectation varies depending on whether or not other advance notice effects (for example, pseudo-continuous effects) are involved. For example, even when an advanced SPSP reach appears, if a notice production with a high expectation of winning is involved, the expectation of winning can be equal to or higher than that of the direct hit SPSP reach. In this specification, for convenience of explanation, the probabilistic reach A and the short-time reach A, which have a relatively low expectation of winning, are treated in the same line as the reach belonging to "N reach", and the probabilistic change having a relatively high expectation of winning is treated. Medium reach B, probabilistic medium reach C, and short-time medium reach B shall be treated in the same line as the reach belonging to "SP reach".

In the present embodiment, the reach effect is passed through in the process of deriving and displaying the combination of decorative symbols indicating the big hit. Therefore, the presence or absence of reach is a clue for the player to know the possibility of a big hit. Therefore, a plurality of types of "expected advance notice effects" are provided as an effect mode that announces (suggests) the possibility of reach, in other words, an effect mode that can more clearly announce the degree of expectation of winning. This "expectation notice production" plays a role as a fanning effect that announces the degree of expectation of winning, but it is possible to announce that a specific effect (for example, reach effect) may occur, or a specific effect. It also plays a role of notifying that the occurrence of the production will be confirmed. Therefore, in a production scenario in which a specific effect such as a reach effect occurs, an expected notice effect may occur before the reach effect, foretelling the possibility of the reach effect and suggesting the degree of expectation of winning. .. That is, the winning expectation is clarified and the winning expectation is increased when one or a plurality of expected notice effects are accompanied, as compared with the case where the reach effect is generated alone. Expected notice production includes "pre-notice production" that can occur before reach production and "post-notification production" that can occur during reach production.

(5-2-2. Pseudo-ream production (pseudo-ream))
In the present embodiment, as one of the expected advance notice effects, there is a "pseudo-ream effect (hereinafter, abbreviated as" pseudo-ream ")". The "pseudo-ream" refers to an effect mode accompanied by a pseudo continuous fluctuation display state (so-called "pseudo-variation") of a decorative pattern. This "pseudo-variation" means that a part or all of the decorative symbols is temporarily stopped during one decorative symbol variation display game (using one or more pseudo-ream dedicated symbols instead of the normal decorative symbols). A variable display mode in which a display operation such as executing a re-variable display operation of a decorative symbol from the temporarily stopped state is repeated one or a plurality of times. In this respect, it is different from the "look-ahead notice effect" described later, which can be executed over a plurality of symbol variation display games. Basically, the rate of occurrence of "pseudo-ren" is set so that the higher the number of pseudo-variations, the higher the expectation of winning. For example, the expectation of the occurrence of a notice effect (for example, SP reach) with a high expectation of winning is higher when the number of pseudo fluctuations is twice than when the number of pseudo fluctuations is once. Therefore, in the case of a production scenario including a reach effect, the "pseudo-ream" is mainly generated in the stage before the reach state is formed (pre-stage of the reach effect), and the pseudo-variation is performed one or more times. After that, the reach effect, which is the main variation, is executed, and the final game result is derived and displayed. In the present specification, when it is referred to as "pseudo-N", it means the total number of times of pseudo-variation M times and this variation. For example, when it is expressed as "pseudo 2", it means "pseudo fluctuation 1 time + main fluctuation", and when it is expressed as "pseudo 3", it means "pseudo fluctuation 2 times + main fluctuation" (for example, pseudo fluctuation in FIG. 25). 2 + SP reach, pseudo 3 + SP reach, etc.). Further, when the pseudo-ream is not attached, it means "no pseudo-ream", and the pseudo-ream does not occur (for example, SP reach in FIG. 25).

(5-2-3. Player participation type production)
Further, in the present embodiment, there is a "player participation type production" as one of the expected advance notice productions. The "player participation type effect" belongs to the so-called "button notice effect", and a predetermined operation (for example, one press, long press, etc.) is performed on the operation means (effect button 13 and / or direction key 75). When repeated hits, etc.) are performed, the content of the effect can be changed based on the operation content. In the player participation type effect, during the predetermined button validity period, the "operation instruction effect" for instructing the operation means to perform a predetermined operation is executed, and the player operates the operation means during the button validity period. Then, based on the operation content, the effect being displayed changes to another effect (effect during operation), and depending on the effect mode (effect content) before and after the operation, the winning expectation, the winning result, or the setting suggestion information Etc. can be notified. The effect control unit 24 sets the operation validity period (button validity period) in which the operation of the operation means is effective based on a predetermined setting condition (for example, a predetermined timing during the player participation type production). Means, pre-operation effect control means for controlling a predetermined pre-operation effect during the button valid period, and post-operation effect control for controlling a predetermined post-operation effect based on the operation of the effect button during the operation valid period. It has the means.

(5-2-4. Step-up production)
Further, in the present embodiment, there is a "step-up notice production" as one of the expected notice productions. The "step-up notice effect" is an effect mode in which one or a plurality of stage effect steps are used. Specifically, the first stage effect (step 1) to the plurality of stage effects (step N (N ≦ 2)). This is a notice production mode in which the expectation of winning is increased when the stage is developed to a higher stage (the expectation of winning is the highest when the stage is developed to the final stage). For example, the three-stage production SU1 If it is a step-up production consisting of ~ SU3, "Direction SU1 (Step 1): Low expectation of winning", "Direction SU1 → Production SU2 (Step 2): Expectation of winning", "Direction SU1 → Production SU2 → Production" The higher the production step stage, the higher the expectation of winning, such as "SU3 (step 3): high expectation of winning." In addition, some step-up productions belong to the player participation type production, for example. , Any of steps 1 to 3 may occur after the operation of the operating means.

(5-2-5. Stage change production)
Further, in the present embodiment, a "stage change effect" may occur as one of the expected advance notice effects. "Stage change effect" means that the current effect stage is changed to another effect stage during the symbol variation display game (for example, at the start of the symbol variation display game or at a predetermined timing during the symbol variation display game). It is a notice production mode that suggests the degree of expectation of winning by shifting. In the "stage change production", the production mode that suggests the degree of expectation of winning according to which production stage the current production stage shifts to, and the type of cut-in production that occurs when the current production stage shifts (for example, after a blue background) The stage transition to the production stage is a notice production mode in which the expectation of winning is low, and the transition to the production stage after the red background indicates the expectation of winning. However, this stage change effect is an effect mode in which the effect stage changes as a notice effect, and even if the stage change effect occurs, the game state (YJ, Tcode) shifts (changes) and the background is displayed. The production mode has not changed. Further, the stage change production may be shifted from one production stage to another production stage because the production is not monotonous, not as a preliminary production (see, for example, the production stage of FIG. 35 described later).

(5-2-4. Look-ahead notice production: Fig. 5A, Fig. 5B)
"Look-ahead notice effect" (hereinafter abbreviated as "look-ahead notice") refers to an operation-holding ball (undigested operation-holding ball) that has not yet been used for executing a symbol variation display game (special symbol variation display operation). , It is an effect mode that can notify in advance the winning expectation degree regarding the operation hold ball by using the hold display mode and the effect in the symbol variation display game that is executed first in chronological order.

The outline of the screen display of the liquid crystal display device according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 5A, including the pre-reading notice. FIG. 5A is an explanatory diagram provided for explaining the screen display of the liquid crystal display device 36 according to the present embodiment.

In a part of the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 (in the figure, below the display area of the decorative symbol), a hold display area 76 for displaying the number of the special figure 1 operation hold balls and the number of the special figure 2 operation hold balls are displayed. A hold display area 77 for displaying is provided, and the presence or absence of the operation hold ball is indicated by a lighting state (with operation hold ball: “○ (white circle)” in the figure) or an off state (without operation hold ball:). Information on the current number of pending balls is notified by the dashed circles in the figure).

The display regarding the presence or absence of the operation hold ball (hereinafter referred to as "hold display") is sequentially displayed in the order of occurrence (winning order), and in each hold display area 76, 77, the leftmost operation hold ball is the said. Of all the active hold balls in the hold display, it is displayed as the earliest (that is, the oldest) active hold ball on the time axis. In the present embodiment, as shown in the figure, hold display units a1 to d1 (icon images) composed of hold icons (icon images) provided in a part of the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 in the same number (4 pieces) as the maximum number of hold storages. (Corresponding to the special symbol 1 side) and a2 to d2 (corresponding to the special symbol 2 side) are provided. The display modes of the hold display units a1 to d1 and a2 to d2 are usually switched to the operation state (lighting state) by the same number as the number of operation hold balls existing at the time of pre-reading determination, for example, only three. Therefore, this hold display unit acts as a hold display means for displaying the number of operation hold balls. However, when executing the look-ahead notice described later, the hold display mode of one of the hold display units a1 to d1 and a2 to d2 corresponding to the hold display unit is changed to a predetermined look-ahead notice display mode (special hold display mode). This works as a means of generating a look-ahead notice.

Further, on the left side of the hold display areas 76 and 77, a changing display area 78 for showing the operation hold ball actually used in the special symbol change display game is provided. In the case of this embodiment, the changing display area 78 is configured so that an image in which the icon of the game in progress hold K currently used for the game is placed appears on the icon of the seat J. That is, when the variable display of the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 is started, the oldest icon (icon image) of the hold a1 or a2 displayed in the hold display areas 76 and 77 is the hold K during game execution. As an icon, the icon is moved onto the icon of the seat J in the changing display area 78, and the state is maintained for a predetermined display time.

Further, in the lower right corner of the liquid crystal screen shown in FIG. 5A, as a display area for a sub-effect (sub-effect) different from the main effect such as a decorative pattern or a notice effect, the operation holding balls of Special Figures 1 and 2 are held. , A sub-display area 79 capable of displaying information on the number of balls on hold for normal drawing, information on the variable display operation of the special figures 1 and 2, and information on the variable display operation of the normal figure is provided. The information in the sub-display area 79 continues to be displayed even when the display of the decorative symbol and / or the hold display unit is hidden in displaying the notice effect. Therefore, it is possible to identify whether or not the symbol variation display game is currently in progress and how many operation-holding balls are by the information in the sub-display area 79.

Depending on the game state (game mode or internal game state), the display area of the hold display area 76 is displayed more emphasized than the hold display area 77 (for example, preferentially displayed or displayed larger), and vice versa. The display area of the hold display area 77 can be displayed more emphasized than the hold display area 76. For example, during the first gaming state (normal state (normal mode)), the hold display area 76 is highlighted, during the second gaming state (for example, time saving state (time saving mode) or probability changing state (probability changing mode)). Middle) can highlight the hold display area 76. Further, both the hold display area 76 and 77 are displayed during the first game state, and the hold display area 77 is preferentially displayed during the second game state (for example, only the hold display area 77 is displayed). Can be done.

(About pre-reading notice)
Next, the look-ahead notice will be described. Regarding the appearance control related to this look-ahead notice, first, when the operation hold ball is generated in the main control unit 20 (when the start condition is satisfied), the operation hold ball is a symbol variation display game (special symbol variation display operation). The "look-ahead hit judgment (look-ahead winning judgment, look-ahead symbol judgment)" is performed to determine in advance the big hit lottery result (winning lottery result, symbol lottery result) related to the operation holding ball before being used for execution. See steps S318 to S319 (random number determination process-special stop symbol data creation process) in FIG. 9 and steps S410 to S411 (special electric accessory operation determination random number determination process-special stop symbol creation process) in FIG. 10 to be described later).

Furthermore, using the above-mentioned "look-ahead hit determination" result, the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol (variation pattern at the start of fluctuation) when the operation holding ball is used to execute the symbol variation display game in the future is determined in advance. "Look-ahead fluctuation pattern determination" is performed (see step S320 in FIG. 9 (random number determination process at the time of winning the start opening)). This pre-determined variation pattern of the special symbol is called a "look-ahead variation pattern". In this look-ahead fluctuation pattern determination, for example, it is determined in advance what kind of reach state the reach fluctuation pattern goes through, or whether the normal fluctuation pattern does not go through the reach state.

Since the pre-reading variation pattern is determined by using at least the winning lottery result (in this embodiment, the preliminary determination result of the winning lottery and the symbol lottery), the pre-reading variation pattern information includes the "winning variation" at the time of winning. Not only information on whether it is a "pattern" or a "loss fluctuation pattern" at the time of winning a loss (information on the winning lottery result), but also the presence or absence of reach (if there is a reach, its type) and the presence or absence of a pseudo-ream (pseudo). Specific notice effects such as information on (the number of times if there is a lottery) may also include execution information. In this way, a series of processes for determining the look-ahead fluctuation pattern through the look-ahead hit determination is referred to as "look-ahead determination".

When the information of the look-ahead fluctuation pattern is transmitted from the main control unit 20 to the effect control unit 24, the effect control unit 24 performs the effect control process related to the look-ahead notice. Specifically, when the look-ahead determination is executed, the "hold addition command" that can specify the number of operation-holding balls at the time of the look-ahead determination (the number of existing operation-holding balls including the operation-holding ball that occurred this time) and the above-mentioned look-ahead fluctuation pattern When the main control unit 20 sends a "winning command" capable of specifying information (at least the information obtained by pre-reading the winning lottery result at the start of fluctuation) to the effect control unit 24, and the effect control unit 24 receives these commands. , Based on the information contained in the command, the effect control process related to the hold display and the look-ahead notice is performed. Specifically, when the effect control unit 24 receives the hold addition command and the winning command, it performs a "look-ahead notice lottery" regarding whether or not to execute (appear) the look-ahead notice based on the look-ahead fluctuation pattern information. When executing the look-ahead notice, the effect scenario related to the look-ahead notice is determined, and the look-ahead notice is displayed according to the effect scenario (see FIGS. 5A and 5B described later). The execution probability of the pre-reading notice lottery is higher in the "big hit" than in the "missing", and in the case of the pre-reading variation pattern type in which the winning expectation is relatively high. Therefore, the winning expectation is indicated by whether or not the pre-reading notice is generated. In addition, the look-ahead notice targets the current operation-holding ball at the timing when the operation-holding ball occurs, at the same time as the start of the symbol variation display game that is performed earlier in chronological order, or at a predetermined timing during the game. A look-ahead notice may appear. In addition, the hold addition command is the data on the upper byte side that makes it possible to specify the special figure type information (different from special figures 1 and 2), and the data on the lower byte side that makes it possible to specify the operation hold ball number information at the time of pre-reading determination. It consists of 2 bytes with. Further, the winning command is composed of two bytes of data on the upper byte side that specifies the winning result and data on the lower byte side that makes it possible to specify the content of the look-ahead fluctuation pattern as the look-ahead determination information (FIGS. 26 and 27). reference).

(Pre-reading notice at the time of winning: Hold change notice)
In this embodiment, when the look-ahead notice is executed (when the look-ahead notice lottery is won), among the hold icons of the hold display units a1 to d1 and a2 to d2, the hold icon targeted for the look-ahead notice is, for example. , From white of normal hold display (normal hold display mode) to white flashing of notice display, hold display with special hold colors and colors of blue, yellow, green, red, and rainbow colors (special hold display mode) A changing pending change notice can be executed. Since this notice of change on hold can appear at the time of winning (holding display), it is also referred to as "pre-reading notice of winning time system".

As a notice of this hold change, FIG. 5A shows an example in which the hatched hold display unit b1 has changed to a special hold display. Here, the display of the hold icon in white, blue, yellow, green, red, and rainbow color means that the winning expectation is high in this order, and in particular, the display of the rainbow-colored hold icon is confirmed as a big hit. It is a premium hold icon (notice of reservation) that will be displayed. The blinking white icon display is a hold icon that suggests the possibility of the "step-up hold change notice" described later, and makes you expect what color the final hold color will be (hold color). May remain blinking white without changing). In the case of blinking white, if the hold display remains the same, the winning expectation is the lowest among the special hold displays, but if it changes to another hold color, the winning expectation due to the hold color increases.

In the present embodiment, regarding the advance notice effect, if the big hit lottery result is lost, it is selected with a relatively low probability (low appearance rate), and if it is a big hit, it is selected with a relatively high probability (high appearance rate). As a notice production with a high expectation of winning, such as, if the expectation of winning is equal to or higher than a predetermined expected value (in this embodiment, the expectation of winning is 20% or more), the "high expectation (expected winning) "High" notice production, and the others are treated as low expectation notice effects. In the case of the above-mentioned pending change notice, the winning expectations of blinking white, blue, yellow, green, red, and rainbow colors are 1%, respectively. If it is 5%, 9%, 20%, 30%, 100%, "green, red, rainbow color" belongs to the high expectation notice production, and the others (blinking white, blue, yellow) are low. It belongs to the expectation notice production. When a look-ahead notice occurs, a high expectation notice (high number of pseudo-reams, SP reach, etc.) with a relatively high winning expectation during the symbol variation display game targeting the operation holding ball ), Combined with the content of the pre-reading notice production, the expectation of winning the winning will be further increased.

The existing operation hold balls are sequentially digested when the symbol variation display game is executed. At this time, in order to express that one operation-holding ball has been digested, the display position of the hold display unit corresponding to the existing operation-holding ball is moved forward (shifted to the left side in sequence), and the number of the display is reduced. Although control (shift display) is performed, the above-mentioned special hold display continues to be displayed continuously while changing the display position of the hold display during this period. In this respect, the look-ahead notice is a single symbol variation such as a pseudo-ream in that a dedicated advance notice effect can appear across multiple symbol variation display games (multiple symbol variation display operations). It is different from the advance notice effect performed during operation.

The special hold display related to the hold change notice is (A) a case where it appears when a prize is won, in other words, a case where it appears at the timing of the hold display, and (B) a normal hold display (white) when a prize is won. However, there are cases where the normal hold display is changed to a special hold display (blue, etc.), and (C) the special hold display, which has a relatively higher expectation of winning than the current special hold display, is changed (for example, from blue to yellow or higher hold). In some cases, the color is changed step-up). In the case of (B) or (C), a predetermined timing during the shift display, a predetermined timing during the previously executed symbol variation display game, a predetermined timing during the appearance of a specific advance notice effect, and a hold. It is possible to change from one hold display mode to another hold display mode during a player-participation type production for a change notice (for example, during a button operation valid period). It should be noted that the hold change notice that changes to the hold display with a higher winning expectation as in (B) or (C) above is referred to as "step-up hold change notice".

Further, when the hold K during game execution is placed on the seat J, basically, the same display mode as the hold display mode in the hold display areas 76 and 77 is maintained, and the symbol variation display game is related to this time. A look-ahead notice (special hold display) for the operation hold ball can be notified to the player even during the game, but the hold display mode of the game execution hold K at a predetermined timing during the symbol variation display game. May change to other hold display modes. Such a change in the display mode of the hold K during game execution is also treated as belonging to the above-mentioned step-up hold change notice.

As a general rule, there is no "falling down of the special hold display" that changes from the current holding color to the holding color with a relatively low expectation of winning, but if there is an exceptional downfall, the operation holding ball is correct. It is suggested that this is the same premium notice of change on hold as the notice of reservation. An example of a downfall is a case where the hold color changes to a hold display such as "blue → white" or "red → blue", which has a lower expectation of winning than the current hold display. In addition, the hold display mode is not limited to the hold icon display by still images (static display mode), but the hold icon display by moving images (animation) (dynamic display mode: for example, the hold icon is rotated, vibrated, oscillated, and blinks. (High-speed blinking or low-speed blinking) may be displayed.

(Pre-reading notice during design fluctuation: Pre-reading notice during fluctuation)
Further, in the present embodiment, unlike the pre-reading notice effect of the above-mentioned "winning time system", the "pre-reading notice during fluctuation" that is made when the symbol variation display game is started can be displayed. This pre-reading notice during change is also referred to as a pre-reading notice of "design change middle system (change start time change system)" because it can appear at a predetermined timing during symbol change display, unlike the above-mentioned pending change notice.

This "pre-reading notice during fluctuation" means, for example, displaying a notice image dedicated to pre-reading on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36, and executing this in one or a plurality of symbol fluctuation display games (single-shot or continuous display). ) Is a look-ahead notice. That is, the pre-reading notice during fluctuation temporarily holds the right to execute the symbol variation display game related to the establishment of the start condition when the game ball wins a prize at the start port and the start condition is satisfied during a certain symbol variation display game. At the same time, a look-ahead notice lottery is performed regarding whether or not to execute the look-ahead notice effect, and when this look-ahead notice lottery is executed, if there are a plurality of operation hold balls (hold memory) existing at that time, , For all or part of the reserved memory, those symbol variation display games can be expressed with some relevance. For example. (For example, a preview image imitating the lightning bolt of FIG. 5B) is displayed. In this case, in each symbol variation display game, a look-ahead notice in which all or a part thereof is different may appear. For example, when appearing over three symbol fluctuation display games, the first symbol variation display game is a thunderstorm image, and the second symbol variation display game is a rain image (an image display expressing how it rains from a thunderstorm) or. The thunderstorm image and the third symbol variation display game can be a lightning bolt image. In addition, the degree of expectation of winning may differ depending on the preview image. In the above example, the thunderstorm image can have a low expectation, the rain image can have a medium expectation, and the lightning image can have a high expectation. In this case, if only the thunderstorm image is used, the expectation of winning is low, but if the lightning bolt image is displayed, the expectation of winning can be dramatically increased. In addition, it may be used as a pre-reading notice of a step-up system in which the degree of expectation gradually develops (the degree of expectation increases) as "thunderstorm image-> rain image-> lightning bolt image" each time the symbol variation display game is executed.

In the present embodiment, the pre-reading notice during change and the notice of pending change can appear independently. Specifically, the lottery for executing the notice of pending change and the lottery for executing the notice of pre-reading during change are independent lottery. Therefore, there are cases where the pending change notice is generated independently, cases where the variable look-ahead notice is generated independently, and cases where the pending change notice and the variable look-ahead notice are generated simultaneously (overlapping). It should be noted that the effect means used when executing the pre-reading notice during fluctuation and the content of the effect can be appropriately determined.

(Example of pre-reading notice production mode: FIG. 5B)
Next, with reference to FIG. 5B, an example of the look-ahead notice effect woven by the game machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described.

In the figure (1), during the symbol variation display game (“↓” in the figure indicates that the decorative symbol is in the variation display), the upper start opening 34 is won and the operation holding ball on the special symbol 1 side is held. Assuming that the number is three, the second operation hold ball on which the fluctuation start operation is executed is the target of the look-ahead notice effect. Here, the hold change notice and the change look-ahead notice are given. Indicates a case where and is duplicated. Further, here, it is assumed that the first and third operation-holding balls held earlier are the operation-holding balls for which the look-ahead notice is not executed (look-ahead lottery is not won).

As shown in FIG. 1 (1), the effect control unit 24 changes the hold display of the second operation hold ball, which is the target of the pre-reading notice, to the special hold display. At this time, the hold display corresponding to the first and third operation hold balls that are not subject to the look-ahead notice is maintained as the normal hold display (white). In the figure, the display mode of the hold display of the second operation hold ball, which is the target of the look-ahead notice, is changed from the normal hold display (white circle (○) mark) to the special hold display (hatched circle mark). Shown. As a result, the player is notified that the pre-reading notice effect has been started. Note that FIG. (1) shows that the symbol variation display game currently being executed has ended, and the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed at "246" corresponding to the loss.

The game progress shifts to the figure (2), and the main control unit 20 starts a special symbol variation display game based on the operation hold ball on the special symbol 1 side, which was the first (oldest operation hold ball). The operation hold ball is digested (one is digested), and the effect control unit 24 shifts the hold display mode corresponding to each operation hold ball to the left at the start of the special symbol variation display game, and the operation hold ball is released. A hold display mode indicating one digested state is set, and the decorative symbol variation display game based on the first operation hold ball is started. At this time, as a pre-reading notice during fluctuation, a dedicated background image (lightning effect by displaying a lightning bolt image) is displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36. As a result, the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 has a display mode as shown in FIG.

Then, the game progress shifts to the figure (3), and it is assumed that the symbol variation display game currently being executed ends and the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed at "351" corresponding to the loss.

Subsequently, the game progress shifts to FIG. (4), and the main control unit 20 plays a special symbol variation display game based on the second operation hold ball, that is, the operation hold ball that is the target of the look-ahead notice effect. The operation holding ball is started and the operation holding ball is digested, and the effect control unit 24 shifts the holding display mode corresponding to each operation holding ball to the left at the same time as the start of the special symbol variation display game, which is the second. Start the decorative symbol variation display game based on the operation hold ball. At this time, the special hold display of the hold change notice disappears from the screen at the time of the above shift, ends at the start of this symbol change display game (with the digestion of the operation hold ball), and then displayed as the game execution hold K. Will be done. In addition, the pre-reading notice during fluctuation (here, lightning bolt production) will also end at the end of the occurrence during this symbol fluctuation display game. FIG. 4 (4) illustrates the screen display of the liquid crystal display device 36 immediately after the start of the symbol variation display game. In addition, in FIG. It has been explained that the occurrence of the inside is terminated at the end, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the occurrence during the previous symbol variation display game may be terminated at the end. In this case, the pre-reading notice during the change is terminated when the "special hold display" of the hold change notice is provided to the execution of the symbol change display game.

(5-2-6. Setting suggestion production)
Further, in the present embodiment, it is possible to appear an effect mode (setting suggestion effect) that suggests information regarding the above "set value". For example, the setting suggestion effects as shown in (a) to (shi) below.
(A) "Low setting suggestion effect" that suggests a low setting range (settings 1-3, 1-2, 2-3, etc.).
(S) "High setting suggestion effect" that suggests a high setting range (settings 4 to 6, 4 to 5, 5 to 6, etc.).
(G) "Even-numbered setting suggestion effect" that suggests even-numbered settings (settings 2, 4, and 6).
(Y) "Odd number setting suggestion effect" that suggests odd number settings (settings 1, 3, 5).
(M) "Specific setting confirmation effect" that deterministically notifies a specific setting value (any of settings 1 to 6). For example, "setting N confirmation effect" that deterministically notifies "setting N". However, it is not preferable to inform the internal set value deterministically. The reason is that anything that definitively suggests a low setting region, such as setting 1 and setting 2 confirmation, reduces the player's willingness to play. Therefore, it is preferable to definitively notify any of the settings 4 to 6 in the high setting region. In particular, if a specific setting confirmation effect such as setting 5 confirmation or setting 6 confirmation appears, the player's willingness to play can be improved.
(M) A "specific setting denial effect" that deterministically notifies that the value is not a specific setting value (any of settings 1 to 6 may be used).
(S) "Specific range suggestion effect" that suggests the set value of a specific range. For example, settings 3 to 5 (α ≤ set value ≤ β) are suggested, settings 4 or more (α ≤ set values) are suggested, and a plurality of specific values of “settings 1, 3, 5, 6” are suggested. .. In addition, the appearance rate is made different according to the set value, suggesting that the possibility of a certain set value is high / low, for example, it is difficult to appear in setting 1, moderately appears in setting 4, and easy to appear in setting 6. It is also possible to do.

The appearance rate (execution probability) of the setting suggestion effect can be appropriately determined according to the set value. For example, it may be set so that the appearance rate of the setting suggestion effect decreases as the set value is relatively low. Further, the effect mode of the setting suggestion effect is not particularly limited, and one or more of the sound effect, the light effect, the image display effect, and the movable body effect can be used.

In addition, the setting suggestion effect can appear at a predetermined timing in the symbol variation display game, for example, in combination with the advance notice effect or independently. Further, it can be made to appear not only in the symbol change game but also in the big hit game or in the "demo start waiting effect" or "customer waiting effect (demo screen)" described later while waiting for the game to start.

Further, by defining the appearance rate of a specific advance notice effect according to the set value, the advance notice effect itself can be made to function as a "setting suggestion effect". For example, the appearance rate of at least one of a specific reach effect, a specific pseudo-ream (a specific pseudo-ream mode or a specific number of pseudo-reams), a specific player participation type effect, and a specific look-ahead notice. By making it different according to the set value, the notice effect itself can function as a "setting suggestion effect". For example, "High setting rich" when a specific SP reach is likely to appear at the time of loss, "High setting rich" when a pseudo-ream 3 times (pseudo fluctuation 2 times + main fluctuation) is likely to appear at the time of loss, a specific button When an operation effect appears, it suggests "setting 6 is confirmed". In addition, it is possible to make the look-ahead notice mode dedicated to the setting suggestion effect appear by using the look-ahead notice effect. For example, when the hold icon blinks at high speed, it is a high setting rich, and when one or all of the hold icons are changed to a dedicated hold icon (dedicated character or item image), it is a "high setting rich" suggestion.

<6. Directing means ＞
Various effects in the game machine 1 are manifested by the effect means provided in the game machine. Such a directing means may be any stimulus transmitting means capable of exerting a directing effect by appealing to human perception such as sight, hearing, and touch, and is a light generating means (light directing means) such as a decorative lamp 45 or an LED device. ), Sound generator (sound effect means) such as speaker 46, effect display device (display means) such as liquid crystal display device 36, pressurizing device that transmits contact pressure to the operator's body, vibration device that gives vibration to the player. (For example, the launch operation handle 15 trembles), a wind pressure device that gives wind pressure to the player's body, or a movable body accessory that exerts a visual effect by its operation is a typical example. Here, the effect display device is a display device that appeals to the eyes like the image display device (image display means), but differs from the image display device in that it includes a display device that does not depend on an image (for example, a 7-segment display). When referred to as an image display device, it mainly refers to a type that displays an effect (image display effect) by displaying an image, and a device that displays an effect other than an image, such as a 7-segment display, is a concept of the above-mentioned effect display device. Included in.

<Processing on the main control unit side: FIGS. 6 to 15>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 6 to 15, the game operation process on the main control unit 20 side of the present embodiment will be described. The processing on the main control unit 20 side is an infinite loop-shaped main processing (main control side main processing: FIG. 6) and a timer interrupt processing activated by a scheduled interrupt from the CTC (main control side timer interrupt processing: FIG. 7) and are mainly configured.

<6. Main control side Main processing: Fig. 6>
The main process on the main control unit 20 side (main process on the main control side) will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing the details of the main processing on the main control side. When the main control side starts the main process, the watchdog timer (WDT) function is exhibited and the CPU is activated when a system reset occurs when recovering from a power failure or power failure, or when the control program runs out of control. May be forcibly reset (WDT reset). In any case, when the main control side main process is started, the main control unit 20 (CPU201) first executes the initial setting process necessary for starting the game operation as a part of the power-on process (step S011). ).

After completing the initial setting process in step S011, it is then determined whether or not the setting value can be changed in the setting change mode transition state (step S014). In the case of the present embodiment, the setting key switch 94 (operated to the setting change mode side) and the RAM clear switch 98 are operated in the state where the power to the game machine 1 is turned off and the door is opened (door open sensor 61 is ON (opening detection)). If the power to the game machine 1 is turned on while the ON operation is performed (both the setting key switch signal and the RAM clear signal are ON), the current setting value is displayed on the setting display 97, and it is assumed that the setting change operation is in progress. , It is controlled to the setting change allowable state (setting change mode transition state) in which the setting value can be changed.

In the setting change mode transition state (step S014: YES), the setting change process for managing the change operation of the set value (steps 1 to 6) is executed (step S023). In this setting change process, first, the setting value storage area of the RAM 203 is cleared, and the ON / OFF operation of the setting change switch 95 related to the setting change operation is monitored. The setting value can be changed to any of the setting values 1 to 6 by operating the setting change switch 95 by a person related to the hall, and the setting change completion switch 96 is turned off. The set value is fixed by. When the CPU 201 confirms that the set value has been determined, the CPU 201 stores the set value data in the set value storage area of the RAM 203, and exits the setting change process. Then, the processing state is shifted to the in-region RAM clear processing (step S031) described later.

The RAM clear switch 98 may function as the setting change switch 95 without providing the setting change switch 95. Each time the RAM clear switch 98 is pressed, any of the setting values 1 to 6 can be selected and configured. Further, the setting key switch 94 may function as the setting change completion switch 96 without providing the setting change completion switch 96. In this case, the setting change operation can be ended by turning off the setting key switch 94.

On the other hand, when it is not in the setting change mode transition state (step S014: NO), the contents of the RAM are checked to determine the presence or absence of the abnormality (step S015). Here, whether or not the setting value stored in the above setting value storage area is a normal value (whether or not a value indicating any of settings 1 to 6 is stored: checking for a setting abnormality error). , Check whether the checksum value at the time of backup is a normal value. If there is an abnormality in the contents of the RAM (step S015: YES), the power re-on wait process (step S020) described later is executed.

When there is no abnormality in the contents of the RAM, that is, it is normal (step S015: NO), then it is determined whether or not the backup flag BF is in the ON state (5AH) (step S016). This backup flag BF has a BF flag storage area of the RAM in the area of "5AH (normal value)" when the backup process is normally executed in the process of the power supply abnormality check process (step S081 in FIG. Is set to. Therefore, under normal conditions, the backup flag BF should be 5AH. However, there may be a case where the backup flag BF is not a normal value (≠ 5AH) due to some trouble. Therefore, when the backup flag BF is not in the ON state (step S016: NO), the power re-on wait process is executed (step S020).

In this power re-on wait process, a control process for forcibly stopping the progress of the game process is executed as a process when a RAM error occurs. This power-on waiting process is a process that is also executed when the RAM in step S015 is abnormal (step S015: YES). When this power re-on wait process is executed and a RAM error state occurs, the power of the game machine 1 is re-turned on, and when the power is turned on again, the operation is performed so that the setting change mode transition state is set. Unless the setting change process of S023 is executed, the RAM error state currently occurring cannot be resolved. In the present embodiment, after the setting change process (step S023) is executed, the RAM clear process in the area (step S031) described later is executed, so that the entire area of the RAM 203 (however, the RAM area related to the performance display (however, the RAM area related to the performance display (however,)) (Except for the RAM area outside the area)) is cleared, and the RAM error is resolved.

When the backup flag BF is in the ON state (step S016: YES), it is determined whether or not it is in the RAM clear mode transition state (step S025). In this RAM clear mode transition state, when the RAM clear operation is performed, specifically, in the state where the power to the game machine 1 is off, the setting key switch 94 is turned off (not operated to the setting change mode side). The transition is made when the power to the game machine 1 is turned on while the RAM clear switch 98 is turned on (setting key switch signal OFF, RAM clear signal ON).

When the RAM clear mode transition state is set (step S025: YES), the in-area RAM clear process is executed (step S031). In the in-area RAM clear processing, at least the storage area excluding the RAM area related to the performance display and the set value storage area among the storage areas of the RAM 203 is cleared. Therefore, the value of the backup flag BF and the checksum value set when the power is cut off are both cleared to zero in this process. Further, here, various commands necessary for clearing the RAM (for example, "RAM clear command" indicating that the RAM has been cleared, "customer waiting command", etc.) are transmitted to the effect control unit 24. When the effect control unit 24 receives the RAM clear command, the initialization notification effect for notifying the RAM clear is executed, and the effect mode is set to the "normal effect mode" as the effect mode in the initial state.

After completing the area RAM clearing process in step S031, the initial setting process for clearing the RAM (initial data setting process when the power is turned on) is then executed (step S032). In the initial data setting process at power-on, for example, 30000 ms is set in the timer for transmitting the RAM clear signal (one of the security signals), and the special symbols displayed on the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b (special diagram 1 stop symbol, Special figure 2 Stop symbol) Loss symbol data is set as data. Then, the CTC setting process (step S036) described later is executed.

Returning to the description of step S025, when the RAM clear mode transition state is not performed (step S025: NO), it is then determined whether or not the current setting value can be confirmed in the setting confirmation mode transition state (setting confirmation allowable state). (Step S026). In the case of the present embodiment, in the state where the power to the game machine 1 is turned off, the setting key switch 94 is turned on and the RAM clear switch 98 is turned off (setting key switch signal ON, RAM clear signal OFF), and the power is supplied. Assuming that the setting confirmation operation has been performed when the ON is turned on, the state shifts to the setting confirmation mode transition state (see steps S014 to S026). The above-mentioned "setting confirmation operation" is an operation performed exclusively when a person involved in the hall confirms the current setting value.

When the setting confirmation mode is in the transition state (step S026: YES), the setting confirmation process (step S027) for controlling the current setting value to the confirmable setting confirmation state is executed, and when the setting confirmation process is completed, the process continues. Then, the backup restoration process (step S028) for restoring the game processing from the backup data backed up at the time of power failure is executed. In the setting confirmation process of step S027, a display process for displaying the current setting value (setting confirmation display) on the setting display 97 is performed. The display of the set value is terminated when the setting key switch is turned off. Then, after the setting key switch 94 is turned off, the backup restoration process is performed, and the CTC setting process (step S036) described later is executed.

On the other hand, when it is not in the setting confirmation mode transition state (step S026: NO), that is, when the power is simply turned on to the game machine 1, the backup restoration process (step S028) is performed, and the game at the time of backup is performed based on the backup data. Restore processing.

After executing any of the above-mentioned setting change processing (step S023), in-area RAM clear processing (step S031), setting confirmation processing (step S027), and backup restoration processing (step S028), the CTC setting The process is executed (step S030). Here, the CTC setting process for generating a timer interrupt is executed periodically every 4 ms. As a result, after that, the interrupt request signal to the interrupt controller is periodically output, and the main control side timer interrupt process (4 ms interrupt process) shown in FIG. 7 is executed.

Then, assuming that the game startable state is ready, the launch control signal (launch permission signal ES) that permits the launch operation of the launch device 32 is set from the OFF state (launch prohibition state) to the ON state (launch permission state), and the game is played. The start command is transmitted to the effect control unit 24. As a result, the launching operation of the game ball from the launching device 32 is allowed. Further, when the effect control unit 24 receives the game start command, the initial operation (initialization operation) related to the movable body accessory is executed. However, during the initialization operation, the image display mode of the liquid crystal display device 36, the light emission mode of the decorative lamp 45, and the sound output from the speaker 46 do not change. The initialization operation here is exclusively an operation check at the time of turning on the power of the movable body accessory.

It should be noted that it is necessary to execute the operation of confirming whether or not the performance indicator 99 is operating normally in the step before executing the CTC setting process of step S036 after executing the backup restoration process of step S028. The "operation check setting process" may be configured to be executable. In the confirmation operation of the performance display 99, for example, the display modes of the four 7-segment displays 99a to 99d are periodically repeated "all blinking" for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds). Control in the "display (operation confirmation display)" mode (operation confirmation display processing). This makes it possible to check for defects such as missing segments. In this case, the display process related to the operation check is performed in the performance display monitor process (step S102: out-of-area program) during the main control side timer interrupt process described later. Since the display of the base value by the performance display 99 is executed in the performance display monitor process (step S102) during the main control side timer interrupt process after the CTC setting process in step S036, the setting change process (step S023). ) And the setting confirmation process (step S027), the display of the base value by the performance indicator 99 is not executed at this stage. Utilizing this point, at least one of the four segments 99a to 99d of the performance indicator 99 is configured to be usable as the setting indicator 97, and the performance indicator 99 is temporarily used as the setting indicator 97. It may be configured to function. In this case, since the setting display 97 can be replaced with the performance display 99, it is possible to contribute to reduction of control load and cost reduction.

When the series of power-on processing is completed, the infinite loop processing of steps S040 to S045 related to the normal game progress is executed. As a result, the game is controlled in a game startable state in which the game can proceed. When entering the loop process, first, various random number update processes are executed (step S041) with the CPU set to the interrupt disabled state (step S040). In this various random number update process, various software random numbers (random numbers circulating in a predetermined numerical range by increment processing) used in the special symbol variation display game and the normal symbol variation display game are updated. For example, a special symbol judgment random number used for a symbol lottery, a random number related to an auxiliary hit lottery (auxiliary hit judgment random number used for a winning lottery per auxiliary, and a normal symbol judgment used for a symbol lottery per auxiliary). Random numbers used to change the initial value (start value) of random numbers (random numbers) (initial value random numbers for special symbol judgment, initial value random numbers for auxiliary hit judgment, etc.), random numbers for fluctuation patterns used for selecting fluctuation patterns, etc. Update.

After completing the various random number update processes (step S041), the performance display monitor aggregation division process of the out-of-area program is then executed (step S043). In this performance display monitor aggregation division processing, processing necessary for calculating the base value to be displayed on the performance display 99 is executed.

When the performance display monitor total division processing in step S043 is completed, the interrupt enabled state is set (step S045), the process returns to step S040, and the processes in steps S040 to S045 are repeatedly executed thereafter (main loop processing). .. The CPU 201 repeatedly executes various random number update processing and performance display monitor aggregation division processing except during the timer interrupt processing that is intermittently executed.

<7. Main control side timer interrupt process: Fig. 7>
Next, the timer interrupt process on the main control side will be described with reference to FIG. 7. FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process on the main control side. This main control side timer interrupt process is started by an interrupt from the CTC at regular time intervals (about 4 ms), and is interrupted and executed during the execution of the main control side main process.

In FIG. 7, when a timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 201 immediately executes a power supply abnormality check process without saving the contents of the register (step S081). In this power supply abnormality check process, the power supply level supplied from a power supply board (not shown) is monitored, and if a power supply abnormality such as a power failure occurs, the backup flag BF is set (BF ← 5AH) and the checksum value. Checksum calculation (here, 8-bit addition calculation processing for the RAM in the area) for calculating the above, and backup processing including storage of the calculation result are performed. The power supply abnormality check process functions as a backup means for retaining data in a predetermined area of the RAM even after the power supply is cut off.

Next, the timer management process is executed (step S082). The timer values of various timers (time) used for the game operation control of the game machine 1 are updated here.

Next, the input management process is executed (step S083). In the input management process, various counters (for example, winning counters for counting winning balls provided for each winning opening) are updated based on the detection information of various sensors and switches provided in the game machine 1. Further, here, the input data is created based on the input information of the status signal from the payout control board 29. If the status signal indicates an abnormality, a predetermined error process is performed in the error management process (step S089) described later.

Next, the setting abnormality check process is executed (step S084). In the setting abnormality check process, it is determined whether the set value data is a normal value (value indicating settings 1 to 6), and if the value is not within the normal range, it is assumed that an abnormality has occurred in the set value data and a setting error occurs. Set the flag to the ON state (5AH). Then, the setting value abnormality command is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 to exit the setting abnormality check process. When the effect control unit 24 receives the set value abnormality command, the effect means is used to execute the setting error notification (RAM error notification). If the setting error flag is ON when this setting error check process is executed again, the process is exited as it is without doing anything.

Next, the random number management process in the timer interrupt is executed (step S085). In the random number management process in the timer interrupt, the random number related to each variable display game is updated periodically. Specifically, in order to make the count value of the random number counter random, the random number is updated (+1 addition for each interrupt) for the special symbol judgment random number and the auxiliary hit judgment random number, and the random number counter goes around. Each time, the start value of the random number counter is changed. Since the internal lottery random number (big hit determination random number) is generated by the above random number generation circuit, it is not updated here.

Next, the error management process is executed (step S089). In this error management process, based on the detection information related to various switches and sensors, the status signal from the payout control board 29, etc., it is monitored whether or not an error (abnormality) has occurred in the game operation, and an error has occurred. In this case, an error command capable of specifying the error type is transmitted to the effect control unit 24, and error processing according to the error type is executed. When the error is cleared, an error clearing command is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 to execute the error clearing process.

Next, the prize ball management process is executed (step S090). In this prize ball management process, the winning counter is confirmed, and if there is a winning, a payout control command for specifying the number of prize balls is transmitted to the payout control board 29. When the payout control board 29 receives the payout control command, the payout control board 29 controls the game ball payout device 19 based on the prize ball number information included therein, and executes the payout operation of the designated prize ball number.

Next, the normal symbol management process is executed (step S091). In this normal symbol management process, necessary processing is executed for the normal symbol variation display game (normal symbol variation display operation). Here, whether or not a game ball is detected by the normal symbol start port sensor 37a is monitored, and if the game ball is detected, predetermined game information (random number for determining auxiliary hit, etc.) required for the auxiliary hit lottery is input. Acquire (Public figure random number acquisition process), and hold and store the game information as hold data (Public figure operation hold ball) up to the maximum number of hold storage numbers (4 in this case) (Public figure hold storage process). Then, when a predetermined variation display start condition is satisfied, an auxiliary hit lottery based on the normal symbol operation holding ball is performed, a variation pattern of the normal symbol is selected based on the auxiliary hit lottery result, and a stop display mode of the normal symbol (normal stop). Design) is decided. Further, here, in order to operate the normal symbol in a variable display operation, the LED display data for the variable display is created if it is changing, and the LED display data for the stop display is created if it is not changing (normally). Design display data update processing).

Next, the ordinary electric accessory management process is executed (step S092). In this ordinary electric accessory management process, the process necessary for executing the Fuden open game is executed. Here, when the lottery result of the auxiliary hit lottery is a win, the solenoid control data setting process for the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 41c is executed. The solenoid control data set here is converted into an excitation signal by the solenoid management process in step S100 described later, and the excitation signal is output to the normal electric accessory solenoid 41c. As a result, the opening / closing operation pattern of the opening / closing lid 47 is controlled.

Next, the special symbol management process is executed (step S093). In this special symbol management process, processing related to the special symbol variation display game is executed. In this special symbol management process, pre-reading judgment and big hit lottery in the special symbol variation display game are mainly performed, and based on the lottery result, the variation pattern of the special symbol (look-ahead variation pattern, variation pattern at the start of variation) and special stop are performed. Determine the design etc. The details of the special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the special electric accessory management process is executed (step S095). In this special electric accessory management process, it is necessary for the winning game, such as the execution control of the winning game according to the winning game and the setting process of the transition destination game state after the big hit game, mainly based on the big hit lottery result. Perform various processing. The special electric accessory management process works as a special game control means for executing and controlling a winning game according to the winning type. The details of the special electric accessory management process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the right-handed notification information management process is executed (step S097). In this right-handed notification information management process, the right-handed display device 39b is turned on when the game is in a "right-handed advantageous" gaming state (during a hit game, in a state with electric support (time saving state or probable change state)). LED data is created, and when the game is in a "left-handed advantageous" gaming state (normal state), LED data for turning off the right-handed display device 39b is created.

Next, the LED management process is executed (step S098). In this LED management process, output control of control signals (dynamic lighting data) is executed for various LED display devices such as a normal symbol display device 39a, a special symbol display device 38a, 38b, and a right-handed display device 39b. The control signal based on the LED display data created by the above-mentioned normal symbol management process (step S091), special symbol management process (step S093), right-handed notification information management process (step S097), etc. is output by this LED management process. Will be done.

Next, the external terminal management process is executed (step S099). In this external terminal management process, various outer end signals are created through the frame external terminal board 21, and output control is executed for an external device such as a hall computer HC.

Next, the solenoid management process is executed (step S100). In this solenoid management process, the solenoid control data set in the ordinary electric accessory management process (step S092) and the special electric accessory management process (step S094) is applied to the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 41c and the large winning opening solenoid 52c. On the other hand, the output control of the excitation signal is executed. As a result, the movable wing piece 47 and the open door 52b are driven and controlled, and the lower start opening 35 and the large winning opening 50 are opened and closed.

Next, all the registers are saved (step S101), the performance display monitor process belonging to the out-of-area program is executed (step S102), and then all the registers are restored (S103). In the performance display monitor processing, necessary processing related to calculation of the base value to be displayed on the performance display 99 and display control is executed.

Next, the count value of the WDT is cleared (step S104). As a result, the WDT is reset for each interrupt and the count value is returned to the initial value.

When the processing of steps S081 to S104 is completed, the timer interrupt processing is completed and the main control side main processing is executed until the next timer interrupt occurs.

<8. Special symbol management process: Fig. 8>
Next, the special symbol management process (step S093) in FIG. 7 will be described. FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing the details of the special symbol management process.

In FIG. 8, the CPU 201 first performs the “special figure 1 start port check process” regarding the special figure 1 side (upper start port 34 side) (step S301), and then the special figure 2 side (lower start port 35 side). "Special figure 2 start port check process" is executed (step S302). The details of the special figure 1 start port check process and the special figure 2 start port check process will be described later with reference to FIG.

After completing the start port check processing in steps S301 to S302, the state of the condition device operation flag is then determined (step S304). This "condition device operation flag" is a flag for designating whether or not a big hit game is in progress, and when the flag is in the ON state (5AH), it indicates that the big hit game is in progress, and the flag When is in the OFF state (00H), it indicates that the jackpot game is not in progress.

When the condition device operation flag is ON, that is, during the big hit game (step S304: = 5AH), the special symbol display in step S309 is performed as it is without performing the processing related to the variation display of the special symbol in steps S306 to S308. Proceed to data update processing. Therefore, the variable display operation of the special symbol is not performed during the big hit game. In other words, during the hit game, the special symbol corresponding to the hit is held in the special symbol display device while being stopped and displayed (confirmed).

On the other hand, in step S304, when the condition device operation flag is in the OFF state (00H) (step S304: ≠ 5AH), that is, when the jackpot game is not in progress (step S304: ≠ 5AH), the special symbol operation status (00H to 03H). ) Is performed. The "special symbol operation status" is a status value indicating the behavior of the special symbol, and this status value is changed according to the processing state and stored in the special symbol operation status storage area of the RAM 203.

In the special symbol operation status branching process in step S305, it depends on which of the status values "waiting (00H, 01H)", "changing (02H)", and "confirming (03H)" the special symbol operation status is. Step S306 to S308 is executed. Specifically, when the special symbol operation status is "waiting (00H, 01H)", the special symbol change start process (step S306) is performed, and when the special symbol operation status is "changing (02H)", it is special. When the symbol changing process (step S307) is "confirming (03H)", the special symbol confirmation time process (step S308) is executed. Here, the above-mentioned "waiting" means that the behavior of the special symbol is in a standby state for the next fluctuation, and "changing" means that the behavior of the special symbol is changing (variation display). The above-mentioned "confirming" indicates that the special symbol has been changed and stopped (confirmed) is being displayed (during the special symbol confirmation time). By these processes, the fluctuation display operation of the special symbol (display operation in which the fluctuation start and the fluctuation stop are set) is realized. The details of the special symbol variation start processing (step S306) and the special symbol confirmation time processing (step S308), which are closely related to the present invention, will be described later in FIGS. 10 and 13A to 13B, respectively.

When any of the processes of steps S306 to S308 is completed, the special symbol display data update process of step S309 described later is performed. In this special symbol display data update process, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is changing, and if it is changing, the data of the special symbol that repeats blinking at predetermined time intervals (data for 7-segment blinking display during fluctuation). ) Is created, and if the special symbol is not changing, data for stop display (data for 7-segment blinking display during stop display) is created. The display data of the special symbol created here is output as LED data in the LED management process (step S098) of FIG. 7, and the variable display and the stop display of the special symbol in the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b are realized. .. As a result, the special symbol management process is exited, and the special electric accessory management process of step S095 of FIG. 7 is executed.

<9. Special figure 1 Starting port check process: Fig. 9>
A special figure 1 start port check process (step S301 in FIG. 8) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing the details of the special drawing 1 start port check process. This special figure 1 start port check process serves as a winning process executed based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition, and is mainly a process related to hold memory when a game ball wins a prize in the upper start port 34. And, it is mainly composed of processing related to pre-reading judgment. It should be noted that the special figure 1 start port check process and the special figure 2 start port check process differ only in whether the processing content is related to the special figure 1 side or the special figure 2 side. The processing contents are substantially the same. Therefore, here, in order to avoid duplicate description, the special figure 1 start port check process will be focused on.

In FIG. 9, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not a winning (winning ball) is detected at the upper starting port 34 (step S311).

When the winning of the upper starting port 34 (starting port on the special drawing 1 side) is detected (step S311: YES), it is determined whether or not the number of balls held in special drawing 1 is 4 or more (step S312). That is, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 is less than the maximum number of reserved balls (here, 4). If the winning of the upper starting port 34 is not detected (step S311: NO), the special figure 1 starting port check process is exited without doing anything.

Special Figure 1 When the number of pending balls is 4 or more, that is, when an over-winning exceeding the maximum number of reserved balls occurs (step S312: YES), an over-winning command for designating the over-winning (for example, in the special figure 1). In this case, B406H, in the case of special drawing 2, B506H) is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (step S324). On the other hand, when the number of balls held in special figure 1 is not 4 or more, that is, less than 4 (step S312: NO), 1 is added (+1) to the number of balls held in special figure 1 (step S313), and step S314 is performed. Proceed to the process of.

Proceeding to the process of step S314, various random numbers used in the special symbol variation display game 1 related to the special figure 1 operation holding ball generated this time are acquired (step S314). Specifically, the current values of the jackpot determination random number, the special symbol determination random number, and the fluctuation pattern random number are acquired from various random number counters, and the acquired random number values are stored in the reserved storage area of the RAM in the area. This hold storage area is an area for storing predetermined game information related to the symbol variation display game as an operation hold ball (hold data), and the above-mentioned various random values as hold data are specially illustrated in this hold storage area. Until the variable display operation of 1 is performed (until the special symbol variable display game 1 is executed), the start conditions are held and stored in the order of establishment (winning order). In the above-mentioned reserved storage area, the reserved storage area corresponding to the special figure 1 side and the special figure 2 side (the special figure 1 reserved storage area corresponding to the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 reserved corresponding to the special figure 2). A storage area) is provided, and each can store hold data for the maximum number of hold balls.

Next, the look-ahead prohibition data (EVENT: "9FH") for prohibiting the look-ahead determination is acquired in the command data (winning command 1) corresponding to the lower byte side (EVENT) of the winning command (step S315), and then, It is determined whether or not the "look-ahead prohibition condition" is satisfied (step S316). This "pre-reading prohibition condition" is a condition for prohibiting pre-reading determination, specifically, a condition for prohibiting pre-reading notice. When the special figure 1 start port check process is in progress, the look-ahead prohibition condition for the special figure 1 operation hold ball is in effect, and when the special figure 2 start port check process is in progress, the look-ahead for the special figure 2 operation hold ball is in progress. Determine whether the prohibition condition is satisfied. In the present embodiment, when the current game state is a game state (time saving state or probability change state) accompanied by a state with electric support, that is, a game state in which a special figure 2 operation holding ball is likely to occur,'special figure 1 look-ahead prohibited. In the case of "a game state with no electric support (normal state or latent state)", that is, in a game state in which a special figure 1 operation holding ball is likely to occur, "special figure 2 look-ahead is prohibited". It is said. Therefore, in the determination process of step S316, when the current gaming state is the time saving state or the probabilistic state, it is assumed that the special figure 1 look-ahead prohibition condition is being satisfied, and the determination result is “YES”. It should be noted that which of Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2 is prohibited from pre-reading can be determined according to the internal game state (game state determination number YJ) and / or the variable pattern distribution designation number Tcode.

When the above-mentioned special figure 1 read-ahead prohibition condition is satisfied (step S316: YES), the setting error flag determination process (step S317) and the read-ahead determination process (steps S318 to S320) are skipped, and the process of step S321 described later is skipped. Proceed to. In this case, the look-ahead determination for the special figure 1 operation pending ball is not executed, and a winning command having the look-ahead prohibition data (EVENT: "9FH") is created (starting opening winning, which will be described later). Time random number determination process (see step S320)). As a result, the execution of the look-ahead notice of the current operation hold ball is controlled to the prohibited state (the look-ahead notice for the current action hold ball is not executed).

Special Figure 1 When the read-ahead prohibition condition is not satisfied (step S316: NO), then it is determined whether or not the setting error flag is in the ON state (5AH) (step S317). When the setting error flag is in the ON state (step S317: = 5AH), that is, when a RAM error (setting error) has occurred, the process related to the look-ahead determination (steps S318 to S320) is skipped, and step S321 described later is performed. Proceed to processing. In this case as well, the look-ahead determination for the operation hold ball this time is not executed, and the winning command with the look-ahead prohibition data (EVENT: "9FH") is created, so that the look-ahead notice is not executed. In other words, the pre-reading prohibition data (9FH) is data that specifies that the pre-reading determination processing (steps S318 to S320) has not been executed.

When the setting error flag is not in the ON state (step S317: ≠ 5AH), the setting value command is transmitted to execute the random number determination process (step S318). This random number determination process is performed as a part of the'look-ahead determination'process, and here, the "winning lottery at the start of fluctuation (described later)" is executed when the operation holding ball is subjected to the variation display operation. In step S410) of FIG. 10 in FIG.

(Set value command)
The above "setting value command" is used when the effect control unit 24 side includes information that can specify the current set value and controls the appearance of the advance notice effect (setting suggestion effect described later) based on the set value. Will be done. This set value command is transmitted every time an operation hold ball is generated in the start port check process. As a result, the effect control unit 24 can control the appearance of the advance notice effect (for example, the setting suggestion effect related to the look-ahead advance notice effect) related to the operation holding ball based on the correct set value information.

In the random number determination process of step S318, first, the “hit random number determination table (not shown)” is acquired, and the random number value for jackpot determination is acquired. Then, based on the acquired random number value for jackpot determination and the winning random number determination table, the winning lottery (pre-reading winning determination) for the operation pending ball this time is executed, and the lottery result (pre-reading winning result) is acquired.

The hit random number determination table includes the hit random number determination table (special symbol 1) corresponding to each of the special figure 1 operation hold ball (special symbol variation display game 1) and the special figure 2 operation hold ball (special symbol variation display game 2). A hit random number determination table and a special figure 2 hit random number determination table) are provided. The "random number determination table for special figure 1" is referred to during the special figure 1 start port check process, and the "random number determination table for special figure 2" is referred to during the special figure 2 start port check process. This hit random number determination table is also used when performing a winning lottery in the "random number determination process for determining the operation of a special electric accessory (step S410 in FIG. 10)" described later.

In these hit random number judgment tables, a judgment area (judgment value) for determining a winning type (whether a big hit, a small hit, or a loss) is provided for each big hit lottery probability state (high probability and low probability). The jackpot judgment random number value (the size of the jackpot judgment random number: 65536) is defined in association with each other. Specifically, the winning type depends on which judgment value the jackpot judgment random number value belongs to. It is supposed to be decided.

In the case of the present embodiment, the hit random number judgment table is provided with a hit judgment table corresponding to each set value (settings 1 to 6) (a table in which at least a lottery probability of a big hit is different depending on the settings 1 to 6). Has been done. Further, in the case of the present embodiment, the ratio of the jackpot lottery probability at the time of high probability to the jackpot lottery probability at the time of low probability (probability increase ratio: high probability / low probability) is the same at each set value, and the ratio is 10. It is set to a value that does not exceed. For example, setting 6 "1/255 at low probability, 1/51 at high probability", setting 5 "1/260 at low probability, 1/52 at high probability", ..., Setting 2 "1/52 at low probability". With 275, 1/55 at high probability, and setting 1 "1/280 at low probability, 1/56 at high probability", the jackpot is won. The probability increase rate may be different for each set value.

After completing the random number determination process in step S318 described above, the special stop symbol data creation process is then executed (step S319). This special stop symbol data creation process is performed as a part of the'look-ahead determination'process, and here, the "symbol at the start of fluctuation" executed when the operation holding ball is subjected to the fluctuation display operation. A'look-ahead symbol determination'for determining the lottery (step S411 in FIG. 10 described later) in advance is performed.

In the above special stop symbol data creation process, the "symbol table (not shown) according to the pre-reading winning result obtained in step S318 and the special symbol type (special figure 1 and special figure 2) to be processed this time. ) ”Is selected. Then, the special symbol determination random value obtained in step S314 is acquired, and based on the selected symbol table and the acquired special symbol determination random value, the symbol lottery (look-ahead) for the current operation pending ball is performed. Execute the symbol determination) and acquire the lottery result (look-ahead symbol result).

The above "design table" includes a "big hit symbol table", a "small hit symbol table", and a "missing symbol table" for determining a jackpot type, a small hit type, and a loss type, and each symbol table is a special symbol. It is provided according to the type. These symbol tables are also used when performing a symbol lottery at the start of fluctuation in the special stop symbol creation process (step S411 in FIG. 10) described later. In the case of this embodiment, since the small hit is not provided, the "small hit symbol table" is not provided.

In the symbol table, the determination area (judgment value) for determining the winning type (symbol type) and the special symbol determination random value (for example, the size of the special symbol determination random value: 200) are defined in association with each other. Specifically, the winning type is determined according to a predetermined symbol lottery rate depending on which determination value the special symbol determination random value belongs to, and the special symbol determination is used as data indicating the lottery result. Data and special stop symbol number are acquired. In the present embodiment, in the case of a big hit, one of the big hit types is determined according to the symbol lottery rate of FIG. The type is determined.

The above-mentioned "special symbol judgment data" is data for identifying the winning type (winning type: big hit type, small hit type, and loss type), and specifically, the hit type (4R probability variation big hit, 10R probability variation jackpot). This is data for identifying which of the 4R time reduction jackpot) and the loss type (loss A to C) was won. This special symbol determination data is a process that requires winning type information (for example, a game state transition preparation process in step S412 of FIG. 10 described later, a special symbol variation pattern creation process in step S413, and a process related to execution control of a jackpot game. (Special electric accessory management process of FIG. 14) and the like. The above-mentioned "special stop symbol number" is data for designating a special stop symbol mode to be stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device, and is a main control. It is used when the stop symbol type of the special symbol (display mode of '7 segment' in this embodiment) is specified on the part 20 side. In the same manner as the special symbol, the ordinary symbol also has the ordinary symbol determination data and A normal stop symbol number is provided.

A common symbol table may be provided for all settings, but a symbol table according to the set value may be provided. For example, it can be configured as follows (A) and (B).
(A) The symbol selection rate of one or a plurality of winning types is different in a part or all of each set value. For example, the symbol lottery rate for a specific probability variation jackpot (for example, 10R probability variation jackpot) can be set so that the higher the set value, the higher the probability.
(B) The probability variation inrush rate (at least the total symbol lottery rate of the jackpot with a high probability state (probability variation jackpot and / or latent probability jackpot)) is different in all or a part of each set value. In the case of this embodiment, the probability variation inrush rate is set to 65% common to all settings (see the symbol lottery probability of 10R probability variation jackpot and 4R probability variation jackpot in FIG. 4), but the probability variation inrush rate of settings 1 to 6 is set to, for example. It can be determined that the higher the set value, the higher the probability (easier to enter the probability change), such as "60%, 61%, 62%, 63%, 64%, 65%". The same applies to the time saving rush rate (total symbol selection rate for time saving jackpots).
In any case, as the set value becomes higher, the ball ejection performance (machine discount) may be determined to be more advantageous to the player.

After completing the special stop symbol data creation process in step S319 described above, the start port winning random number determination process is then executed (step S320). This start port winning random number judgment process is also performed as part of the'look-ahead judgment'process, and here, the "variation pattern at the start of fluctuation" when the operation hold ball is subjected to the fluctuation display operation Performs'look-ahead fluctuation pattern judgment'to be judged in advance. .. Specifically, the result of the "special symbol variation pattern creation process (step S413)" shown in FIG. 10 described later is pre-read and determined.

Specifically, for the pre-reading symbol determination result (at least the winning lottery result obtained in the random number determination process (step S318)) obtained in the special stop symbol data creation process (step S319) and the variation pattern acquired in step S314. Using a random number (magnitude of random number value: 10000), the "variation pattern at the start of fluctuation" related to the operation hold ball this time is pre-read and determined. Since the look-ahead pattern judgment determines the fluctuation pattern at the start of fluctuation in advance, a separately provided "look-ahead judgment table" having the same basic configuration as the fluctuation pattern distribution table used at the start of fluctuation. Refer to. However, in the case of this embodiment, in order to reduce the program capacity, the fluctuation pattern distribution table shown in FIGS. 24 to 25, which will be described later, is provided as "at the time of winning (pre-reading determination) and at the start of fluctuation". , At both the time of winning and the time of the start of the fluctuation, the fluctuation pattern distribution table is referred to, and the fluctuation pattern at the start of the fluctuation is pre-read and determined based on the random value for the fluctuation pattern acquired in the process of step S314.

Then, "command data at the time of winning" is acquired as the look-ahead determination result. Here, as the command data constituting the winning command, the command data on the "MODE1 (1st byte (upper byte))" side that can specify the distinction between hit and loss and the content of the look-ahead fluctuation pattern can be specified. "The command data on the EVENT (second byte (lower byte)) side is acquired. That is, the look-ahead variation pattern (excluding the operation pending ball number information) is obtained by the command data determined in the start opening winning random number determination process. ) Will be specified.

Below, in order to facilitate the understanding of the present invention with respect to the fluctuation pattern distribution table shown in FIGS. 24 to 25, not only at the time of winning a prize (at the time of pre-reading determination) but also at the time of the start of fluctuation (FIG. 10 described later). The above-mentioned random number determination process at the time of winning the starting opening (step S320) will be described with reference to the contents of the special symbol variation pattern creation process (see step S413).

The start port winning random number determination process is configured to include the following processes (a) and (b) as a process for determining a "winning command" for designating a look-ahead variation pattern.
(A) With reference to the "variable pattern distribution table selection table" shown in FIG. 23, the "variable pattern distribution table determination process at the time of winning" for determining the "variable pattern distribution table" and
(B) With reference to the "variation pattern distribution table (FIGS. 24 and 25)" determined in (a) above, the look-ahead variation pattern is supported based on the variation pattern random value acquired in the process of step S314. It is configured to include a "winning command data determination process (look-ahead fluctuation pattern determination process)" for determining the winning command data.

(Variable pattern distribution table selection table (at the time of winning): Fig. 23)
FIG. 23 shows a variation pattern distribution table selection table. In the variable pattern distribution table selection table of the present embodiment, there are a plurality of types of "variable pattern distribution tables" associated with the special symbol type, the winning type, the number of balls on hold, and the variable pattern distribution designation number Tcode. Is stipulated. Specifically, any one of a plurality of types of fluctuation pattern distribution tables (FH1-9, FB1-4) based on the special symbol type, the winning type, the number of pending balls, and the fluctuation pattern distribution designation number Tcode. One "variable pattern distribution table" is to be determined. This fluctuation pattern distribution table selection table is not only used when determining the "winning command" at the time of winning (pre-reading judgment), but also for processing related to the determination of the "variation pattern specification command" at the start of fluctuation. It is also used in this case (see the special symbol variation pattern creation process in step S413 of FIG. 10 described later), and serves as a variation pattern distribution table selection table that is shared (common) at the time of winning and at the start of variation. However, at the time of pre-reading determination (the above-mentioned "winning fluctuation pattern distribution table determination process"), the number of operation-holding balls is ignored (with the operation-holding balls set to zero), and the purpose is obtained from the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern distribution table selection table. The fluctuation pattern distribution table (see FIGS. 24 and 25) of the above is selected (this will be described later). On the other hand, at the start of fluctuation, a value obtained by subtracting the number of operation-holding balls used for the current fluctuation display operation from the existing operation-holding balls (number of operation-holding balls-1) is referred to as information on the number of operation-holding balls (FIG. 23). In the column of "Number of balls on hold" in the above, see steps S403 and S413 of the special symbol change start processing of FIG. 10 described later).

(Variable pattern distribution table (at the time of winning): Fig. 24, Fig. 25)
Next, the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern distribution table will be described. FIG. 24 shows a fluctuation pattern distribution table selected at the time of hitting, and FIG. 25 shows a fluctuation pattern distribution table selected at the time of loss.

With reference to FIGS. 24 to 25, the above-mentioned "variable pattern distribution table" includes a plurality of types of hit variable pattern distribution tables "FB1 to 6" that can be selected at the time of hitting, and a plurality of types that can be selected at the time of loss. The variable pattern distribution table "FH1 to H9" for loss is included. These fluctuation pattern distribution tables are provided as a table for both setting 1-look-ahead determination and fluctuation start. Therefore, the following data groups are defined in the fluctuation pattern distribution table.

(B) In the fluctuation pattern distribution table, the command data (“MODE1” in the figure) on the upper byte (first byte) side for constructing the winning command for specifying the look-ahead fluctuation pattern and the lower byte (2 bytes) The command data on the eye) side (“EVENT” in the figure) and the random value for the fluctuation pattern (magnitude of the random value for the fluctuation pattern: 10000) are defined in association with each other. The above-mentioned "MODE1" is command data that can specify the distinction between hit and loss, and "EVENT" is command data that can specify the content of the look-ahead fluctuation pattern. At the time of pre-reading judgment, this fluctuation pattern distribution table is referred to, and a winning command is configured depending on which judgment value the fluctuation pattern random value belongs to (lottery using the fluctuation pattern random value). Command data is determined. As a result, a winning command is created and the content of the look-ahead variation pattern is specified (see FIGS. 26 and 27). When this winning command is transmitted to the effect control unit 24, the effect control unit 24 side grasps the content of the look-ahead fluctuation pattern.

(B) In addition, the fluctuation pattern distribution table also defines data related to the "variation pattern specification command" that specifies the fluctuation pattern at the start of fluctuation. Specifically, in the variation pattern distribution table, the command data (“MODE2” on the upper byte (first byte) side) for configuring the variation pattern specification command and the lower byte (second byte) side. Command data (“EVENT” in the figure) and the random value for the fluctuation pattern are defined in association with each other. The above-mentioned "MODE2" is command data that can specify the distinction between hit and loss, and "EVENT" is command data that can specify the content of the fluctuation pattern. This fluctuation pattern distribution table is also referred to at the start of fluctuation (see the special symbol fluctuation pattern creation process (step S413) of FIG. 10 described later), and the above fluctuation pattern designation command is issued by lottery using the random value for the fluctuation pattern. The command data to configure is determined. As a result, a fluctuation pattern designation command is created, and the content of the fluctuation pattern at the start of fluctuation is specified (see FIGS. 26 and 27). The "variation pattern specification command" is composed of 2-byte control data consisting of "MODE2" and "EVENT", like the winning command, and when this variation pattern specification command is transmitted to the effect control unit 24, , The effect control unit 24 side grasps the fluctuation pattern at the start of the fluctuation.

Here, in FIGS. 24 and 25, the “selectivity” is shown for convenience of explanation, but in reality, the command data at the time of winning or the fluctuation pattern designation command is determined according to the random value for the fluctuation pattern. The determination area (determination value: range of 0 to 9999) is defined, and these command data are determined depending on which determination value the random number value for the fluctuation pattern belongs to.

The relationship between the random value for the fluctuation pattern shown in FIGS. 24 and 25 and the determination value is as follows. For example, if the loss fluctuation pattern distribution table "FH1" of FIG. 25 is described as a representative example, the judgment value "FH1" is referred to from the place where the judgment value is first described when viewed in the column direction from the top to the bottom of the drawing. 10 ”,“ 8990 ”, and“ 1000 ”are described in this order. In this content, the random value for the fluctuation pattern (BRND = 0 to 9999) is in the range of the determination value 0 to 9 (the description of the above“ 10 ”). If it belongs to the column), the command data that specifies "normal fluctuation 13s" is selected, and if it belongs to the range of judgment values 10 to 8999 (corresponding to the description column of "8990" above), "normal fluctuation 16s" is selected. The command data to be designated is selected, and when the judgment value belongs to the range of 9000 to 9999 (corresponding to the description field of "1000" above), the command data to specify "N reach 1" is selected. In the case of the present embodiment, the blank portion in the figure, that is, the address where the determination value is stored, does not mean that the determination value data is not stored, but "0" is stored as the determination value. This is to facilitate the adjustment of the selectivity when developing a new model or at the design development stage.

To explain this by taking a simple example, for example, in the loss fluctuation pattern distribution table "FH1", the determination values are distributed to the normal fluctuation 13s, the normal fluctuation 16s, and the N reach 1, but tentatively, the normal fluctuation If 8s is also selected, it may be necessary to change the data structure again, and the design may be restarted from scratch. Further, although not shown, when a fluctuation pattern distribution table for each set value is provided, it becomes necessary to change these data structures. Generally, when developing a new model, various judgment values are set, and the design is performed while adjusting the judgment values in consideration of the balance of fluctuation time (suppression of fluctuation slump) and the balance of production such as reach production. I will go. Therefore, the design may be designed based on the initially set judgment value, or may need to be changed. Therefore, the address of the storage destination of the judgment value of the fluctuation pattern considered to be out of the selection target at the design stage is provisionally set to zero as the judgment value data, and if a change occurs, the value is changed as appropriate. It is included in the fluctuation pattern of the selection target. For example, in the judgment value data of the loss fluctuation pattern distribution table "FH1", the normal fluctuation 4s "0", the normal fluctuation 8s "0", the normal fluctuation 13s "10", the normal fluctuation 16s "8990", Data including zeros (blank parts in the figure) such as normal fluctuation 16s “0” for pre-reading notice, N reach 1 “0” for pre-reading notice, and N reach 1 “1000” are stored. In the case of the present embodiment, when the loss A is won in the normal (normal state), as shown in the figure, since N reach 2 and later are predetermined as fluctuation patterns that are not to be selected, the tables “FH1” to “FH4” Judgment value data including "0" is stored in each of the normal fluctuations 4s to N reach 1 within the address range (consecutive addresses in this case) (of course, the selection target is the fluctuation after N reach 2). It may be a pattern). When the judgment value is "0", the lottery process (look-ahead fluctuation pattern (command at the time of winning) determination processing and fluctuation pattern (variation pattern specification command) determination processing) is executed, but the fluctuation pattern with a judgment value of zero is Since it is not actually selected, it can be registered as a "variation pattern that is not used". On the other hand, when adjustment is required at the design stage, it is possible to change from "unused fluctuation pattern" to "selection target fluctuation pattern" by setting a value other than zero as appropriate. In this way, for fluctuation patterns that are not used, if the judgment value is left at zero and the same address allocation as the address allocation at the development stage is used when developing a new model, the table data structure can be changed one by one. There is no need to change it, and the design change can be made extremely easy. The same applies to other fluctuation pattern distribution tables.

As described above, in the fluctuation pattern distribution table, the command data constituting the "winning command" is determined at the time of winning depending on which judgment value the random value for the fluctuation pattern belongs to, and at the time of starting the fluctuation. The command data that composes the "variation pattern specification command" is determined.

Here, in the present embodiment, at the time of pre-reading determination, the number of operation-holding balls is ignored (the operation-holding ball is set to zero), the variation pattern distribution table selection table of FIG. 23 is referred to, and the target variation pattern distribution is performed. It has been explained that the table (see FIGS. 24 and 25) is selected, and the reason is as described below.

The above-mentioned "variation pattern distribution table selection table" is a table that is used both at the time of winning and at the start of fluctuation, but the number of balls on hold at the time of winning does not necessarily match the number of hold on operation at the start of fluctuation. Therefore, at the time of pre-reading determination (at the time of winning), the target variable pattern distribution table (FIGS. 24 and 25) is selected with the operation holding ball set to zero. For example, when the current game state is normal (Tcode = 00H), the operation holding ball to be read ahead this time is the special figure 1 side, and the winning type is the loss A (special figure 1 side loss A winning). , The variable pattern distribution table "FH1" is selected regardless of the number of balls on hold at the time of winning.

However, even if the number of operation hold balls at the time of pre-reading determination and the number of operation hold balls at the start of fluctuation do not match, the look-ahead variation pattern is determined by ignoring the number of operation hold balls in the dark clouds. There is a possibility that there will be a big difference between the content of and the content of the fluctuation pattern at the start of fluctuation. More specifically, at the time of winning, the main control unit 20 sends a "winning command" including the look-ahead fluctuation pattern information to the effect control unit 24, and the effect control unit 24 that receives the command is based on the hold addition command. , Performs production control related to pre-reading notice production. On the other hand, at the start of fluctuation, the main control unit 20 sends a “variation pattern designation command” including fluctuation pattern information at the start of fluctuation to the effect control unit 24, and the effect control unit 24 that receives the command sends the fluctuation pattern specification command. Based on the above, the effect control including the variation display operation effect of the decorative symbol (decorative symbol variation display effect (decorative symbol effect described later)) and the advance notice effect (notice effect during change) in the decorative symbol variation display game is performed. Due to such a relationship, if there is a large difference between the content of the look-ahead fluctuation pattern and the content of the fluctuation pattern at the start of fluctuation, the relationship between the content of the look-ahead notice and the content of the notice during change is broken, and the reliability of the notice production is increased. There is a risk that the fun will be reduced and the player's willingness to play will be diminished. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the look-ahead determination is provided with the following characteristic element (first characteristic element).

(First characteristic element)
With reference to the fluctuation pattern distribution table selection table of FIG. 23, for example, when the current game state is normal, the operation holding ball to be read ahead this time is the special figure 1 side, and the winning type is lost A (special). In the case of the loss A) on the FIG. 1 side, as described above, the loss variation pattern distribution table “FH1” is selected at the time of pre-reading determination regardless of the number of balls on hold. On the other hand, at the start of fluctuation, one of the fluctuation pattern distribution tables "FH1 to FH4" is selected according to the number of pending balls ("00H (normal), special figure 1, loss A" column of FIG. 25). reference).

Here, referring to FIG. 25, in the fluctuation pattern distribution table "FH3 to FH4", "normal fluctuation 4s, normal fluctuation 8s, normal fluctuation 13s" and the like belonging to the normal fluctuation (normal fluctuation pattern) type can be selected (normal fluctuation 4s, normal fluctuation 8s, normal fluctuation 13s) and the like (normal fluctuation pattern). (Determinable), but these are defined as "variable pattern types for non-look-ahead notice" in which the look-ahead notice is not executed. This non-look-ahead notice variation pattern is specifically a look-ahead fluctuation pattern of "not subject to the look-ahead notice lottery" or "a target of the look-ahead notice lottery, but the winning probability is zero (pre-reading notice is not executed)". is there. In the case of this embodiment, among the normal fluctuation types, the target of the look-ahead notice is only the “normal change for look-ahead notice 16s” that can be selected in the case of loss B (see “FH5” in FIG. 25). ..

Further, in the fluctuation pattern distribution tables "FH1" and "FH2", in addition to "normal fluctuation 13s and normal fluctuation 16s" belonging to the normal fluctuation type, N reach 1 belonging to the N reach type can be selected. Here, the mere "N reach 1" is different from the pre-reading notice N reach 1 and belongs to the non-look-ahead notice variation pattern. Therefore, when the special figure 1 side loss A in the normal state is won, the fluctuation pattern (look-ahead fluctuation pattern) that is the target of the look-ahead notice is set at the time of winning (“FH1” is selected at the time of pre-reading judgment). Never selected. That is, there is a case where a variation pattern of a different system is determined at the time of winning and at the start of variation, for example, a case where it is determined to be N reach 1 at the time of pre-reading determination and a case where it is determined to be normal variation at the start of variation. However, in the case of the special figure 1 side loss A in the normal case, since the pre-reading notice does not appear, no particular problem occurs. In addition, it is not always necessary to make the pre-reading notice not appear at all, and a problem arises if the pre-reading notice rarely appears when the normal fluctuation 13s, the normal fluctuation 16s or the N reach 1 is selected. It is considered that there is no such thing. For example, at least one of the normal fluctuation 13s, the normal fluctuation 16s, and the N reach 1 fluctuation pattern can be used as the look-ahead advance notice fluctuation pattern. It is preferably the normal variation 13s and / or N reach with a relatively low probability of selectivity, and more preferably the normal variation 13s with the lowest selectivity. However, in this case, in order to prevent the look-ahead notice from appearing excessively, the appearance rate of the look-ahead notice (the probability of winning the look-ahead lottery) is lower than that of the normal fluctuation 16s for the look-ahead notice and / or the N reach 1 for the look-ahead notice. It is preferable to determine.

Further, as shown in FIG. 25, when the special figure 1 side loss B (normal medium special figure 1 side loss B) is won during normal operation, the special figure 1 side loss C (normal medium special figure 1 side loss C) If you win, or if you win any of the losses A to C on the special figure 2 side (normally the loss on the special figure 2 side), both at the time of winning and at the start of fluctuation, regardless of the number of balls on hold. , The common loss fluctuation pattern distribution tables "FH5", "FH6", and "FH7 (common to all losses)" are selected. In addition, if any of the losses A to C is won during the probable change (probability change state) (Tcode = 01H) or the time reduction (time reduction state) (Tcode = 02H), it depends on the special figure type and the number of pending balls. However, the fluctuation pattern distribution table "FH8" common to all losses is selected when the probability is changing, and "FH9" is selected when the time is shortened. That is, in the case of pre-reading judgment at the time of winning the normal medium special figure 1 side loss B, the normal medium special figure 1 side loss C, the probability change medium loss A to C, or the time saving medium loss A to C winning, at the time of winning and at the start of fluctuation. In each case, since the common fluctuation pattern distribution table is referred to for each operation reserved ball number, the fluctuation pattern at the start of fluctuation can be accurately pre-read and determined.

Therefore, even if either the special figure 1 side or the special figure 2 side loses during each game state, the relationship between the content of the pre-reading notice and the content of the changing notice is broken. The problem does not occur.

(About the second characteristic element)
Generally, even in the state without electric support, the number of balls on hold for operation can change by about 1 or 2 in a relatively short time. If a variation pattern can be selected according to the number of pending balls by using this, the production time (execution time of the symbol variation display game) can be changed for each symbol variation display game, resulting in various effects. Can be generated. In particular, if the average execution time (symbol variation time) of one symbol variation display game at the time of loss is set to a short time (for example, about several seconds), the so-called "variable slump (symbol variation display game is not executed)". The rate of occurrence of "period)" increases, and it becomes easier for the player to feel that "it does not turn or is not interesting", the interest in the game declines, and the repeat rate of the game decreases. Therefore, if the average execution time of one symbol variation display game is lengthened, it is considered that the operation holding balls can be easily accumulated and the occurrence rate of the variation slump can be reduced.

However, if the execution time of the symbol variation display game is set to an unreasonably long time, the progress speed of the game slows down, the production during the fluctuation of the angle becomes a sloppy production, and the tension for winning the big hit due to the advance notice production is interrupted. This gives the player a feeling of boredom and dissatisfaction. In addition, if the execution time of the symbol variation display game is unnecessarily long, overflow of the operation hold ball (starting prize exceeding the maximum hold memory number (4 pieces)) is likely to occur, that is, the execution right of the game There is a risk that much will be lost and the player's willingness to play will decline. Therefore, it is necessary to devise a way to generate a well-balanced pattern variation display game execution time. For example, a variation pattern selection technique that takes into consideration the number of pending balls at the start of variation and the gaming state is important. In particular, in the progress of the game, it is important to have a variation pattern selection technique that focuses on the loss that many players encounter.

In view of such a problem, in the present embodiment, the “loss variation pattern distribution table” of FIG. 25 has a characteristic configuration. Hereinafter, the details will be described with a focus on the “loss variation pattern distribution table“ FH1 to FH9 ”” that is selected when the loss is won.

<A. Features of the fluctuation pattern distribution table related to the normal middle loss winning: Fig. 25>
First, with reference to FIG. 25, the loss fluctuation pattern distribution table "FH1 to FH7" in the normal state will be described.

In the present embodiment, the loss types include a plurality of types of losses A to C, and the lottery rates for these symbols are 95% for loss A, 4% for loss B, and 1% for loss C. (See Fig. 4 Remarks column). Here, as shown in FIG. 25, when the special figure 1 side loss A is won, one of the fluctuation pattern distribution tables "FH1 to FH4" is selected according to the number of balls on hold. However, if the special figure 1 side loss B is won, the common fluctuation pattern distribution table "FH5" is selected regardless of the number of pending balls, and even if the special figure 1 side loss C is won, the above-mentioned loss B Similarly, the common fluctuation pattern distribution table “FH6” is selected regardless of the number of pending balls. Further, even when any of the losses A to C on the special figure 2 side is won, the common fluctuation pattern distribution table "FH7" is selected regardless of the number of pending balls.

The fluctuation pattern distribution tables "FH1 to FH7" related to the winning of the normal medium loss have the following characteristics (α) to (Δ). Hereinafter, for convenience of explanation, the fluctuation pattern distribution table selected regardless of the number of pending balls is also referred to as a “common fluctuation pattern distribution table”.

(A-1. Fluctuation pattern distribution table (variation pattern distribution table according to the number of pending numbers) "FH1 to FH4")
(Α) Loss fluctuation pattern Each of the distribution tables "FH1 to FH4" has at least "a plurality of types of normal fluctuations can be selected". Specifically, when "FH1" is selected, there is a possibility that normal fluctuation 13s, normal fluctuation 16s, or N reach 1 (variation time 26s) is selected, and when "FH2" is selected. May be selected for normal variation 13s, normal variation 16s, or N reach 1. Further, when "FH3" is selected, normal fluctuation 8s or normal fluctuation 13s may be selected, and when "FH4" is selected, normal fluctuation 4s or normal fluctuation 8s is selected. There is a possibility. The normal fluctuation 16s belongs to the "longest normal fluctuation (longest normal fluctuation pattern) type" having the longest fluctuation time among the normal fluctuation types, and the normal fluctuation 4s has the shortest fluctuation time among the normal fluctuation types "shortest normal fluctuation (shortest)". It belongs to "normal fluctuation pattern) type". In the present embodiment, "normal fluctuation 16s" in which at least the fluctuation time of "normal fluctuation 16s for pre-reading notice" is set to be substantially the same as the fluctuation time of "normal fluctuation 16s for pre-reading notice" is determined according to the number of operation hold balls (holding memory number), but with different selectivity. The configuration is selectable (decidable).
It should be noted that (Z1) the present invention can include a loss variation pattern distribution table in which the longest normal variation and / or the shortest normal variation can be selected at different selectivity depending on the number of pending balls. (Z2) Further, the present invention has a first specific fluctuation pattern (for example, normal fluctuation 16s) and a shortened fluctuation pattern (for example, normal fluctuation 4s) whose fluctuation time is shorter than that of the first specific fluctuation pattern, depending on the number of balls on hold. , Normal fluctuation 8s or normal fluctuation 13s), and a fluctuation time that is substantially the same as the fluctuation time of the first specific fluctuation pattern regardless of the number of pending balls. It can include a second loss variation pattern distribution table capable of determining a second specific variation pattern (for example, normal variation 16s for pre-reading notice). (Z3) Further, the present invention also includes a first loss fluctuation pattern distribution table capable of determining a first specific fluctuation pattern (for example, normal fluctuation 16s) with different selectivity according to the number of pending spheres, and the number of reserved spheres. A second loss fluctuation pattern distribution table capable of determining a second specific fluctuation pattern (for example, normal fluctuation 16s for pre-reading notice) having a fluctuation time substantially the same as the fluctuation time of the first specific fluctuation pattern regardless of Can include. In this case, the selectivity of the first specific variation pattern (normal variation 16s) can be configured to be different for each number of operation-holding balls.

Therefore, paying attention to the overall image of the loss fluctuation pattern distribution table "FH1 to FH4", when the loss (in this embodiment, loss A) that many players encounter in the progress of the game is won, the operation holding ball is relatively large. When there are many (when the number of holdings is 2 to 3), it is easy to select a fluctuation pattern with a relatively short fluctuation time, and when there are relatively few operating holding balls (when the number of holdings is 0 to 1), the fluctuation time is easy to select. It becomes easier to select a relatively long fluctuation pattern. As a result, an appropriate speed is exerted during the fluctuation time, which can contribute to a decrease in the occurrence rate of the fluctuation slump, and the player feels that the operation holding balls are accumulated and spinning. Further, in the loss fluctuation pattern distribution table "FH1 to FH4", the normal fluctuation is selected with a high probability, and the smaller the number of balls on hold for operation, the higher the probability of the reach fluctuation selection rate. The reach variation of the selection target is "N reach (reach variation with a relatively short fluctuation time)" belonging to the low expectation reach. As a result, the expectation of winning will not be insulted at the time of loss. According to the loss fluctuation pattern distribution table "FH1 to FH4" according to the present embodiment, it is well-balanced that it contributes to the reduction of the occurrence rate of the fluctuation slump and does not instinctively incite the winning expectation at the time of loss. You will be able to create a symbol variation display game.

In addition, the configuration in which the "reach fluctuation (reach fluctuation pattern)" can be selected in the loss fluctuation pattern distribution tables "FH1" and "FH2", in other words, the reach fluctuation occurs when the number of pending balls is relatively small. Although the configuration is selectable, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the reach variation may be selected only in the fluctuation pattern distribution table “FH1”, that is, the reach variation may be selected only when the number of pending balls is the smallest. Further, in the fluctuation pattern distribution table "FH1 to FH4", only the normal fluctuation may be selected.

In the present embodiment, when the normal fluctuation type is distinguished by the length of the fluctuation time, the fluctuation pattern of 10 seconds or more such as the normal fluctuation 16s type and the normal fluctuation 13s type is treated as a "long fluctuation pattern" having a relatively long fluctuation time. .. On the other hand, fluctuation patterns of less than 10 seconds, such as normal fluctuation 4s type and normal fluctuation 8s type, are treated as "short fluctuation patterns" in which the fluctuation time is relatively short. The reason for making such a distinction is that, in a general ball game machine, if the game ball is continuously fired for about 10 seconds, it is considered that an operation holding ball can be generated with a high probability. In the case of the present embodiment, in addition to the normal variation 4s and the normal variation 8 which can be selected during the normal variation, the ones belonging to the short variation pattern include the normal variation 2s during the probability variation, the normal variation 8s during the probability variation, and the time reduction. There are time-saving medium-normal fluctuations 3s and time-saving medium-normal fluctuations 9s that can be selected among them (see the columns of the fluctuation pattern distribution tables "FH8" and "FH9" in FIG. 25), but such short fluctuation patterns are existing. It is easy to select when the number of operation holding balls is large, or in a gaming state accompanied by an "electric support state" in which operation holding balls are likely to occur.

(Β) The loss fluctuation pattern distribution table "FH1 to FH4" is set so that the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern (high frequency fluctuation pattern) having the highest selectivity among the fluctuation patterns defined by each is different (). The fluctuation time of the high frequency fluctuation pattern differs depending on the number of balls on hold). Specifically, regarding the fluctuation time of the high frequency fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation time is long in this order of "FH4 (hold 3), FH3 (hold 2), FH2 (hold 1), FH1 (hold 0)". It is stipulated to be. That is, it is defined that the fluctuation time of the high frequency fluctuation pattern becomes relatively long as the number of pending balls decreases. In the case of the present embodiment, the high-frequency fluctuation pattern is "normal fluctuation (normal fluctuation pattern)" (high-frequency normal fluctuation pattern), and specifically, as shown in FIG. 25, the fluctuation pattern distribution table "FH1". In the case of "normal fluctuation 16s", in the case of "FH2", it is "normal fluctuation 13s", in the case of "FH3", it is "normal fluctuation 8s", and in the case of "FH4", it is "normal fluctuation 4s". Further, the average fluctuation time (average execution time of one symbol fluctuation display game) when the fluctuation pattern distribution table "FH1 to FH4" is selected is "FH4 (hold 3), FH3 (hold 2), FH2". In this order of (hold 1) and FH1 (hold 0), the average fluctuation time is set to be long. In other words, the smaller the number of pending balls, the longer the average fluctuation time.

(A-2. Normal medium special figure 1 side loss B common fluctuation pattern distribution table at the time of winning: "FH5")
(Γ) In the loss fluctuation pattern distribution table "FH5", a fluctuation pattern type having a winning expectation of "less than SPSP reach type (highest expectation reach type)" can be selected. In the present embodiment, as shown in the figure, in addition to the N reach type and the SP reach type, the "longest normal fluctuation (longest normal fluctuation pattern) type" having the longest fluctuation time among the normal fluctuation types can be selected ( See the FH column in FIG. 25). Specifically, the "SPSP reach type (developed SPSP reach, direct hit type SPSP reach)", which has a higher expectation of winning than the "SP reach type" (the fluctuation time is longer than the SP reach type), is not selected. The average fluctuation time when the loss fluctuation pattern distribution table "FH5" is selected is relatively longer than that of the above-mentioned loss fluctuation pattern distribution table "FH1 to FH4".

(A-3. Normal medium special figure 1 side loss C common fluctuation pattern distribution table at the time of winning: "FH6")
(Δ) In the loss fluctuation pattern distribution table "FH6", at least "SPSP reach type" can be selected, that is, the highest expectation reach fluctuation type can be selected. In other words, it can be said that the table configuration selects the fluctuation pattern with the longest fluctuation time among the reach fluctuation patterns. In the case of this embodiment, as shown in the figure, only the SPSP reach type (developed SPSP reach, direct hit type SPSP reach) can be selected. Therefore, the average fluctuation time when the loss fluctuation pattern distribution table "FH6" is selected is longer than the fluctuation pattern distribution table "FH1 to FH5" related to other normal medium loss winnings (the longest average fluctuation time). ).

(Special figure 2 side normal middle loss common fluctuation pattern distribution table at the time of winning: "FH7")
(Ε) Loss fluctuation pattern distribution table “FH7” is a fluctuation pattern distribution table when the special figure 2 side loss is won, not when the special figure 1 side loss is won. In this embodiment, as shown in the figure, only the normal variation type (here, the normal variation 16s) is selected. That is, if a reach occurs during the special symbol change display game 2 during normal operation (during special figure 2 change), the winning confirmation is notified at that time. Normally, there is no electric support, there is almost no prize in the lower starting port 35, and it is rare that a special figure 2 operation holding ball is generated. Therefore, there is no need to make it possible to select a wide variety of fluctuation patterns, and providing a wide variety of fluctuation patterns indiscriminately leads to an increase in the control load.

<B. Features of the fluctuation pattern distribution table related to the probability change or the loss during the time reduction>
(B-1. Common fluctuation pattern distribution table "FH8" at the time of winning all losses during probability change, common fluctuation pattern distribution table "FH9" at the time of winning all losses during time saving)
(Ζ) If the loss is won during the probability change or the time reduction, the loss fluctuation pattern distribution table corresponding to each game state is selected at least regardless of the number of pending balls. In the present embodiment, the loss fluctuation pattern distribution table "FH8" is selected during the probability change, and the loss fluctuation pattern distribution table "FH9" is selected during the time reduction, regardless of the special symbol type, the number of balls on hold, and the loss type. (Refer to the columns of "01H (probability change)" and "02H (time reduction)" in FIG. 23 and the columns of "probability change" and "time reduction" in FIG. 25). The reason for adopting such a table configuration is that fluctuation slump is unlikely to occur during probabilistic change or time reduction, and during probabilistic change or time reduction, emphasis is placed on the playability of "enjoying the production" as in normal times. A game that emphasizes gameplay, such as "increasing the average digestion speed of the game to improve the villa-likeness (increasing the ball ejection speed to give a ball ejection feeling)" instead of setting the game state (directing mode). This is because it is preferable to set the state (effect mode), and it is not necessary to provide a large number of variable pattern distribution tables as in normal cases.

By the above-mentioned "variable pattern distribution table related to the loss winning", the following actions and effects can be achieved.

(Α) The types of loss include multiple types of loss A to C, and the lottery rate for these symbols is 95% for loss A, 4% for loss B, and 1% for loss C (loss A> loss B). > Loss C) (see the remarks column in Fig. 4). In the present embodiment, by utilizing the relationship of the symbol lottery rate, a plurality of short fluctuation patterns having different fluctuation times are selected when the loss A is won and the number of pending balls is relatively large. When the number of holding balls is relatively small, it becomes easy to select a plurality of long fluctuation patterns having different fluctuation times. Further, when the loss A is won, the reach fluctuation is selected with a lower probability than when the loss B or the loss C is won. As a result, the symbol fluctuation with a long fluctuation time does not occur frequently, that is, the fluctuation time is moderately slowed down, which not only contributes to the reduction of the occurrence rate of the fluctuation slump, but also accumulates the operation holding balls and rotates. It is possible to generate a well-balanced pattern variation display game execution time such that the player feels as if (for example, see (α) to (δ) above).
(Β) In addition, when the loss A is won during normal times, the smaller the number of balls on hold for operation, the longer the average fluctuation time (the average execution time of one symbol fluctuation display game). In other words, as the number of pending spheres increases, the average fluctuation time is shortened (see, for example, (α) and (β) above). As a result, the execution time of the symbol variation display game is not unnecessarily prolonged, the occurrence rate of the fluctuation slump can be suppressed, and the overflow occurrence rate of the operation hold ball can also be suppressed. Execution time can be generated. In particular, it is suitable for "normal" in which the period of stay can be long in terms of game progress.
(Γ) Also, if you win the loss A during normal, the normal fluctuation is selected with a higher probability than the reach fluctuation, and if you win the loss B, the low expectation reach type (N reach or SP reach) has a high probability. If the player wins the loss C, a high expectation reach type (developed SPSP reach, direct hit SPSP reach) is selected with a high probability (see, for example, (α) to (δ) above). That is, in most cases of loss, an effect related to normal fluctuation (normal variation effect) appears, and a reach effect can be produced at an appropriate frequency. As a result, the player is not expected to win the prize excessively. In addition, the rarely appearing high-expectation reach production can greatly enhance the game interest (winning expectation).
(Δ) During the probability change or the time reduction, a common fluctuation pattern distribution table is selected regardless of the type of loss and the number of balls on hold (see (ζ) above). As a result, the program capacity is reduced, and the control load can be significantly reduced.

(Third characteristic element)
Further, in the present embodiment, as already described, "normal variation 16s for pre-reading notice" and "N reach 1 for pre-reading notice" are provided. These fluctuation patterns are defined as fluctuation patterns for pre-reading notice, and have the following features.
(A) As shown in FIG. 25, the fluctuation time of the "normal fluctuation 16s for the look-ahead notice" is substantially the same as the fluctuation time of the "normal fluctuation 16s" belonging to the non-look-ahead notice fluctuation pattern type, and is "N for the look-ahead notice". The fluctuation time of "reach 1" is substantially the same as the fluctuation time of "N reach 1" belonging to the non-look-ahead notice fluctuation pattern type. These fluctuation patterns belong to the long fluctuation pattern. In the case of the present embodiment, "normal fluctuation 16s for pre-reading notice" and "normal fluctuation 16s" are defined as the longest fluctuation time among the normal fluctuation types (belonging to the longest normal fluctuation type).
(B) Further, as shown in FIG. 25, the “normal variation 16s for pre-reading notice” and the “normal variation 16s” have the same system of variation patterns, but the values of the winning commands are different from each other. Further, "N reach 1" for pre-reading notice and "N reach 1" are also fluctuation patterns of the same system, but the value of the command at the time of winning is different from each other.
(C) "Normal fluctuation 16s for pre-reading notice" and "normal fluctuation 16s" are fluctuation patterns belonging to low expectation fluctuation patterns (normal fluctuation type, N reach type), and their winning expectations are substantially the same. is there. Similarly, "N reach 1 for pre-reading notice" and "N reach 1" are fluctuation patterns belonging to the low expectation fluctuation pattern, and their winning expectations are substantially the same.

Regarding the functions of "normal fluctuation 16s for pre-reading notice" and "N reach 1 for pre-reading notice" as described above, the fluctuation pattern distribution table selection table of FIG. 23, the loss fluctuation pattern distribution table of FIG. I will explain while touching on the relationship with the appearance control of.

If Loss A is won during normal operation, at the start of fluctuation, one of the Loss fluctuation pattern distribution tables "FH1 to FH4" (variation pattern distribution table according to the number of reservations) is selected according to the number of pending balls ( (See FIG. 25), normal variation 16s or N reach 1 can be selected (see “FH1” and “FH2” in FIG. 25). In rare cases, the loss B (design lottery rate 4%) is won, but at this time, it is selected in the loss fluctuation pattern distribution table "FH5" (common fluctuation pattern distribution table), and the normal fluctuation 16s for pre-reading notice is selected. " Alternatively, "N reach 1 for pre-reading notice" may be selected (see "FH5" in FIG. 25). Here, the game situation in which the player has the highest probability of encountering the game in the “normal” period in which the stay period can be long in the progress of the game is the winning of the loss A (design lottery rate 95%).

Therefore, as the first effect, when the fluctuation pattern of the low expectation degree is selected, the pre-reading notice does not appear excessively, and the player's expectation of winning is not unnecessarily fueled.
Further, as a second effect, when the operation hold ball related to the look-ahead notice is used in the symbol variation display game, the winning expectation due to the look-ahead notice can be maintained for a long time. More specifically, when a pre-reading notice related to a short fluctuation pattern such as a normal fluctuation 4s or a normal fluctuation 8s is generated, the execution time of the symbol variation display game related to the operation holding ball targeted for the pre-reading notice is short, so that it is large. The notice production that was done does not appear and ends easily. In addition, when the execution time of the symbol variation display game is short, a white blinking hold icon (suggests a step-up hold change notice) is displayed, or a step-up hold change notice using the game running hold K is suggested. It ends easily without fueling expectations. In such a case, the player is confused, such as "What was the meaning of that look-ahead notice?" However, in the case of the present embodiment, the "pre-reading notice normal fluctuation 16s" and the "look-ahead notice N reach 1" belong to the long fluctuation pattern (in the case of the present embodiment, the longest normal fluctuation). Problems can be prevented.

Although there is a difference between "normal fluctuation 16s for pre-reading notice" and "normal fluctuation 16s" whether or not they are subject to pre-reading notice, the same effect can be executed in both symbol fluctuation display games. It is preferable (the same applies to the relationship between "N reach 1 for pre-reading notice" and "N reach 1"). That is, the "normal fluctuation 16s" for non-pre-reading notice and the "normal fluctuation 16s" for pre-reading notice that defines a fluctuation time that is substantially the same (including the same) as this, the same production mode during the symbol change. Regardless of which variation pattern is selected, the player is made to recognize that the same variation pattern is selected in terms of production. In this way, by distinguishing fluctuation patterns that are the same in content but have different selection rates into those for non-pre-reading notice and those for pre-reading notice, the pre-reading notice appears appropriately at the time of loss and excessive pre-reading is performed. It is possible to prevent the advance notice from being executed and to moderately fuel the player's expectation of winning (to prevent the player from feeling stress due to the appearance of excessive pre-reading advance notice). Can be done). It should be noted that the “same effect” referred to here preferably means that at least the variation display of the decorative pattern (decorative pattern effect described later) and the advance notice effect are the same, but the “variation display of the decorative pattern” and / Or the "notice effect" may be the same. However, in order to make the effect look similar in terms of effect, it is preferable that the variation display mode of the decorative pattern is different, but the other effects are the same. Further, only one or more look-ahead normal variation types having the same function as the "look-ahead notice normal variation 16s" may be provided, or only the look-ahead N reach type having the same function as the "look-ahead notice N reach 1". May be provided one or more.

Further, as described above, "normal variation 16s" and / or "N reach 1" may be defined as the variation pattern for pre-reading notice. In this case, the appearance rate of the look-ahead notice is set to a lower probability than that of "normal fluctuation 16s for look-ahead notice" and / or "N reach 1 for look-ahead notice". For example, regarding the appearance rate (execution rate) of the look-ahead notice, it is assumed that the relationship satisfies "normal variation 16s <normal variation 16s for look-ahead notice" and "N reach 1 <N reach 1 for look-ahead notice".

Returning to the description of FIG. 9 again, when the start port winning random number determination process is completed in step S320, a “winning command” is created based on the command data determined in the start opening winning random number determination process, and this is produced and controlled. It is transmitted to the unit 24 (step S321). 26 and 27 show a list of winning commands. If the look-ahead is prohibited or an abnormality occurs in the set value data, the look-ahead prohibition data "9FH" is maintained as it is, and a winning command having the "look-ahead prohibition data" is transmitted to the effect control unit 24. It will be. In this case, an appropriate value, for example, "B3H" is acquired as the value on the upper byte (MODE1) side, and a pre-reading prohibition winning command (B39FH) is transmitted.

Next, a "hold addition command" for designating the number of operation hold balls at the time of pre-reading determination is created (step S322), and this is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (step S323). This "hold addition command" is composed of 2 bytes, and the upper byte (MODE) side that specifies whether the operation hold ball targeted for pre-reading this time is the special figure 1 side or the special figure 2 side, and at the time of winning. It is composed of a lower byte (EVENT) side that specifies the number of balls on hold. The hold addition command is used when the effect control unit 24 side notifies information about the current number of operation hold balls to the hold display areas 76 and 77 when an operation hold ball is generated, or when a look-ahead notice effect is executed. Is also used when issuing a look-ahead notice regarding the hold subject to the notice.

When the winning command and the hold addition command are transmitted from the main control unit 20, the effect control unit 24 that receives the command will notify the pre-reading if the information contained in the command is "other than the pre-reading prohibition designation". A lottery regarding whether or not execution is possible (pre-reading notice lottery) is performed, and if this is won, a pre-reading notice production scenario is created, and based on that scenario, the pre-reading notice for the current operation pending ball is executed and controlled. .. On the other hand, in the case of "pre-reading prohibition designation", the pre-reading notice lottery is not executed, or the pre-reading notice lottery is executed, but the lottery result is forcibly processed as a loss (without executing the notice effect), and the pre-reading notice is given. Prohibit the occurrence of. In this embodiment, the command at the time of winning of the pre-reading prohibition designation is transmitted in both the case where the pre-reading is prohibited or the setting error error occurs, and the reason is as follows. ..

In the case of the present embodiment, the game operation is not forcibly stopped and controlled even if a setting error occurs. The first reason is that the resolution of the setting error error can be resolved by performing the setting change operation as described above, but the setting change operation during business is a matter that encourages joy from the viewpoint of legal request. There is a high possibility that it falls under the prohibited items. Secondly, if the game operation process is forcibly stopped immediately when a setting abnormality error occurs, the player feels distrust at the sudden stop of the game. For example, when the symbol variation display game in process is executed during normal operation, or when a big hit game is in progress, a setting error error occurs by chance, and the game is controlled so that the game cannot be played immediately. If this happens, the profit that the player should originally obtain will be lost, causing the player to feel distrust. In consideration of such circumstances, when a setting abnormality error occurs, the error notification is stopped, and the game progress itself is conditional, but the game progresses as it is. The reason for expressing "conditionally" is that when a setting error occurs, pre-reading notice is prohibited or the result of the symbol variation display game is forcibly lost (Fig. 9). See step S317 (= 5AH) and the processing route in step S409 (= 5AH) of FIG. 10 described later).

As described above, the special figure 1 start port check process is exited, and then the special figure 2 start port check process (step S302) is executed.

<10. Special symbol change start processing: Fig. 10>
Next, the special symbol variation start processing (step S306) in FIG. 8 will be described. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the details of the special symbol variation start processing.

In FIG. 10, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not the number of balls on hold in FIG. 2 is zero (step S401), and if the number of balls on hold in FIG. 2 is not zero (step S401: NO), FIG. 2 The processing (steps S403 to S416) at the start of the fluctuation targeting the number of pending balls is executed. On the other hand, when the number of special figure 2 operation hold balls is zero (step S401: YES), it is subsequently determined whether or not the special figure 1 operation hold ball number is zero (step S402), and the special figure 1 operation hold ball is determined. If the number is not zero (step S402: NO), the processing at the start of fluctuation (steps S403 to S416) for the number of balls on hold in FIG. 1 is executed. By the processing of steps S401 and S402, "priority" of which of the special figure 1 operation holding ball and the special figure 2 operation holding ball is preferentially subjected to the variable display operation (which operation holding ball is digested). "Fluctuation order" is decided. In the present embodiment, when the operation holding ball is present in both the special figure 1 operation holding ball and the special figure 2 operation holding ball, the special figure 2 operation holding ball is preferentially digested.

When the number of operation-holding balls in both the special figure 2 operation-holding ball number and the special figure 1 operation-holding ball number is zero (step S401: YES and step S402: YES), the state of "no operation-holding ball". Will be. This "no operation hold ball" state is a state in which a special symbol is waiting and there is no hold memory. Therefore, when "no operation hold ball" is set, the process proceeds to step S417, and it is determined whether or not the special symbol operation status is "waiting (00H)" indicating the state of the above "no operation hold ball". Step S417).

If the special symbol operation status when the above "no operation hold ball" state is "waiting (01H)" (step S417: NO) (process during the special symbol confirmation time of FIG. 13A described later). (Refer to step S472 in the middle), the special symbol operation status is switched to "waiting (00H)" (step S418). Then, as the effect control command, a customer waiting command (BA04H) is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (step S419), and the special symbol change start process is exited. When the production control unit 24 receives the above-mentioned customer waiting command, a demo movie for explaining and introducing (demonstrating) the game related to the game machine 1 is played based on a predetermined execution condition. ) ”Is revealed. Specifically, after receiving the customer waiting command, the game is not started, that is, the operation hold ball is not generated (without receiving the hold addition command), and the predetermined time (for example, 180 seconds) is set. When it has passed, the customer waiting effect is displayed. Until the waiting time (180 seconds) until the start of the customer waiting effect elapses, the display state of the decoration stop symbol stopped after the end of this symbol variation display game is continuously displayed, and the decoration lamp 45 emits light in a predetermined light emission pattern. Then, the speaker 43 exhibits a "demo start waiting effect" in which the sound is muted (a predetermined sound effect may be executed), and this state is maintained until the customer waiting effect is started. Further, the effect control unit 24 ends the customer waiting effect and shifts to the "power saving mode" when a predetermined transition condition (power saving mode transition condition) is satisfied after the start of the customer waiting effect (demo screen). In the case of this embodiment, when a predetermined time (for example, 120 seconds) elapses after the start of the customer waiting effect (demo screen) without generating the operation hold ball and switching to the menu screen (game setting screen). , The effect mode is changed to the power saving mode, the liquid crystal display device 36 displays the power saving screen (for example, the character display of "power saving is in progress" on the liquid crystal screen), and a part of the decorative lamp 45 or other effect LEDs or Control to turn off everything (power saving control).

If the number of balls on hold in FIG. 1 or the number of balls on hold in FIG. 2 is not zero (steps S401: NO or S402: NO), steps S403 to S416 are sequentially executed. It should be noted that the processing method of steps S403 to S416 described below is substantially different in that the target is the special figure 1 operation holding ball or the special figure 2 operation holding ball. Is the same. Therefore, in order to avoid duplicate description, unless there is a particular need, the process will be described without distinguishing which operation holding ball is targeted.

Proceeding to step S403, the number of operation-holding balls on the special drawing side to be used for the current fluctuation display operation is subtracted by 1 (step S403), and a "holding subtraction command" including information on the number of operation-holding balls after the subtraction is issued to the effect control unit 24. (Step S404).

Next, the special symbol operation confirmation data is stored (step S405). This special symbol operation confirmation data is information for designating the special symbol type of the fluctuation start side this time, and is "00H" if the special figure 1 is the fluctuation start side, and if the special figure 2 is the fluctuation start side. For example, "01H" is stored in the special symbol operation confirmation data.

Next, the hold data stored in the hold storage area of the RAM 203 is shifted (step S406), and the hold 4 storage area is cleared to zero (step S407). In the processing of steps S406 to S407, the reserved data stored in the reserved storage area (reserved 1 storage area) corresponding to the number of reserved storages n = 1 is read and stored in the determination random number storage area of the RAM in the area. , The hold data stored in the hold storage area corresponding to the hold n storage area (n = 2, 3, 4) is stored in the hold storage area corresponding to'n-1'(step S406), and hold. 4 Clear the storage area and provide a free area (step S407). As a result, the start order of the special symbol variation display game coincides with the order of the number of operation hold balls n (n = 1, 2, 3, 4), and the operation hold balls acquired at the time of winning the start opening are stored in any hold. While it is specified whether it corresponds to the area, it is possible to hold and store a new operation holding ball.

Next, the game state information transmission process is executed (step S408). In the game state information transmission process, a "game state designation command" is transmitted to the effect control unit 24. The game state designation command here includes game state information that can specify the game state at the start of the game. Upon receiving the game state designation command, the effect control unit 24 grasps the game state based on the information contained therein, and manages the effect mode in a form that maintains consistency with the game state managed by the main control unit 20 side. To do. The game state information included in the game state specification command may be the minimum information necessary for performing the target game process, for example, "internal game state (game state determination number YJ)" and / or "variation pattern". It can be information including the distribution designation number Tcode.

In addition, here, if necessary, a "time reduction command" that can specify the remaining time reduction number is transmitted if the time reduction is in progress, and a "ST number specification command" that can specify the remaining ST number is transmitted if the probability change is in progress. Will be done. The effect control unit 24 grasps the remaining time reduction number and the remaining ST number based on the information included in these commands, and notifies the remaining time reduction number or the remaining ST number in an effecting manner, "remaining time reduction display effect (countdown display). ) ”Is revealed. When the probability change state continues until the next big hit (including the case where it continues until the next big hit), it is not necessary to send the ST count specification command.

(Processing route when the set value is normal: Processing route following S410)
Next, it is determined whether or not the setting error flag is in the ON state (5AH) (step S409). When the setting error flag is not in the ON state (step S409: ≠ 5AH), the setting value command is transmitted to the effect control unit 24, and then the random number determination process for determining the operation of the special electric accessory is executed (step S410). In this special electric accessory operation determination random number determination process, the jackpot determination random number value is used to execute a "winning lottery at the start of fluctuation" for the operation holding ball used for the current variation display operation. Since the basic processing procedure of this processing is the same processing procedure as the random number determination processing of step S318 of FIG. 9 described above, the description will be omitted as appropriate to avoid duplicate description.

In the random number determination process for determining the operation of the special electric accessory in step S410, first, based on the special symbol operation confirmation data, the hit random number determination table on the processing target side this time (for example, if the special figure 1 side is the processing target, the special figure 1 Get the winning random number table). Next, the jackpot determination random number value stored in the determination random number storage area is acquired, and the winning lottery based on the jackpot determination random number value and the winning random number determination table is executed. Then, if the lottery result is "big hit", the big hit judgment flag is set to "5AH", and if the big hit is not won, that is, if it is "missing", "00H" is set to the big hit judgment flag. To do.

Next, the special stop symbol creation process is executed (step S411). In this special stop symbol creation process, the "design lottery at the start of fluctuation" is executed by using the winning lottery result in step S410 and the random value for determining the special symbol. Since the basic processing procedure of this processing is the same processing procedure as the special stop symbol data creation processing (step S319) shown in FIG. 9 already described, the description will be omitted as appropriate to avoid duplicate description.

In the special stop symbol creation process of step S411, first, a symbol table (big hit symbol table or lost symbol table) corresponding to the special symbol operation confirmation data (special symbol type) and the winning lottery result of step S410 is selected. For example, when the special symbol operation confirmation data is 00H and the jackpot judgment flag is 5AH, that is, when the fluctuation start side of this time is'special figure 1 side'and the winning lottery result is'big hit', "special". "Big hit symbol table for FIG. 1" is selected. Then, the special symbol determination random number value stored in the above-mentioned determination random number storage area is acquired, a symbol lottery based on the selected symbol table and the special symbol determination random number value is executed, and the special symbol determination which is the lottery result is executed. The data and the special stop symbol number are stored in the corresponding areas of the RAM in the area.

After completing the special stop symbol creation process in step S411, the game state transition preparation process is then executed (step S412). In this game state transition preparation process, as a setting for shifting the game state, a setting process necessary for designating the game state after the winning game is performed. Details of this game state transition preparation process will be described later in FIG.

Next, a special symbol variation pattern creation process is executed (step S413). In this special symbol variation pattern creation process, the symbol lottery result of the special stop symbol creation process (step S411), the random number for the variation pattern, the variation pattern distribution designation number (Tcode) (current game state), and the set value information (necessarily). (Acquired accordingly) and the number of operation-holding balls (excluding the operation-holding balls used for this variation display operation, the number of existing operation-holding balls 0 to 3: see step S403), etc. The variation pattern of the special symbol for the operation holding ball to be operated is determined. Then, in order to inform the effect control unit 24 of the content of the variation pattern, a "variation pattern specification command" including the variation pattern information capable of specifying the variation pattern content is created as an effect control command, and this is used by the effect control unit. It is transmitted to the 24 side.

The special symbol variation pattern creation process is basically the same as the start-up winning random number determination process (step S320 in FIG. 9), which is the look-ahead variation pattern determination process described above. Since the basic processing procedure of this processing is the same processing procedure as the random number determination processing at the time of winning the start opening (step S320 in FIG. 9), the description will be omitted as appropriate to avoid duplicate description.

The special symbol variation pattern creation process is configured to include the following processes (A) to (F), with the "variation pattern specification command" for designating the variation pattern at the start of the variation as the process related to determination.

(A) With reference to the "variation pattern distribution table selection table" shown in FIG. 23, the "variation pattern distribution table determination process at the start of fluctuation" for determining the "variation pattern distribution table" and
(B) With reference to the “variation pattern distribution table (FIGS. 24 and 25)” determined in (A) above, the variation pattern is supported based on the variation pattern random value acquired in the process of step S314. "Variation pattern specification command data acquisition process (variation pattern determination process)" to acquire command data of variation pattern specification command,
(C) The fluctuation time (including the addition time required for the pseudo-ream) corresponding to the fluctuation pattern determined by the fluctuation pattern determination process is determined, and the timer management area of the RAM in the area is the "special symbol accessory operation timer". "Fluctuating time setting process" to be set to "
(D) It is configured to include a "command transmission process" for transmitting the variation pattern designation command acquired in (B) above to the effect control unit 24.

At the start of fluctuation, unlike the time of winning (at the time of pre-reading determination), the fluctuation pattern distribution table is selected in consideration of the number of operation-holding balls (the number of operation-holding balls at the start of fluctuation in step S403). As already explained, in the fluctuation pattern distribution table, there are a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns related to the special symbol, the special symbol type, the winning type, the number of balls on hold, the fluctuation pattern distribution designation number Tcode, and the random number value for the fluctuation pattern. It is determined in association with the above, and one of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns is selected from a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns by lottery using random numbers for fluctuation patterns. Specifically, the command data on the upper byte side (MODE2: specify the type of hit loss) and the lower byte side (EVENT: fluctuation pattern information) for constructing the "variation pattern specification command" at the start of fluctuation are determined. (See FIGS. 24 and 25). As a result, the fluctuation pattern specification command is determined, and the content of the fluctuation pattern at the start of the fluctuation related to the current symbol fluctuation display game is specified. As shown in FIGS. 26 and 27, this fluctuation pattern designation command has a value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern.

With the determination of the fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern is determined, and the fluctuation time of the current fluctuation pattern is determined. Note that this fluctuation time is the game time (variation display time of the decorative symbol (effect time)) of the decorative symbol variation display game executed in synchronization with the special symbol variation display game.

The information regarding the variation pattern determined in this way includes at least the winning lottery result (in the case of this embodiment, the detailed symbol lottery result information is included in the decorative symbol designation command), the current gaming state, and the variation time. Information, execution designation information of a specific notice effect (presence or absence of reach effect and its type, pseudo-continuous designation information, etc.) are included. The main control unit 20 transmits a "variation pattern designation command" capable of specifying the contents to the effect control unit 24, and the information included in the variation pattern specification command is the design variation of this time on the effect control unit 24 side. It is used when determining the production scenario related to the display game (variable display of decorative patterns, various notice effects, etc.).

After completing the special symbol fluctuation pattern creation process in step S413, the changing flag corresponding to the current fluctuation start side is set to the ON state (5AH) (step S414). The above-mentioned "changing flag" is a flag indicating which of the special symbols 1 and 2 is changing, and when the flag is in the ON state (5AH), it indicates that the special symbol is changing. When the flag is in the OFF state (00H), it indicates that the special symbol is stopped. In this embodiment, the "special symbol 1 changing flag" corresponding to the special figure 1 and the "special symbol 2 changing flag" corresponding to the special figure 2 are dealt with. For example, if the special symbol 1 side is the processing target (variation start side) this time, the special symbol 1 changing flag is set to ON, and the special symbol 2 changing flag is set to OFF.

Next, a decorative symbol designation command capable of specifying the symbol lottery result information obtained in the special stop symbol creation process in step S411 is acquired, and this is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (step S415). The decorative symbol designation command includes information on the special symbol type on the variable side and the winning type (design lottery result). This decorative symbol designation command mainly includes a combination of decorative symbols when forming a reach state (a symbol type whose component is a reach symbol), a combination of decorative symbols that are finally stopped and displayed (decorative stop symbol), and a combination of decorative symbols. It is used when determining the advance notice effect corresponding to the winning type in the symbol variation display game. When the effect control unit 24 receives the variation pattern specification command and the decorative symbol specification command, the effect control unit 24 determines the effect to be executed during the symbol variation display game based on the information contained in these commands, and determines the effect to be executed during the decorative symbol variation display this time. Start the game.

Then, as the setting process at the start of fluctuation, the special symbol operation status is switched to "changing (02H)" (02H is stored in the special symbol operation status), and 00H is stored in the random number storage area for determination (zero clear) (step S416). ).

As described above, when the special symbol variation start process is exited, the special symbol display data update process (step S309) of FIG. 8 is performed, and thus the variation display of the special symbol is started. As a result, the process goes through the special symbol management process (step S093) and proceeds to the special electric accessory management process (step S095) of FIG.

(About the case where a setting error occurs: Processing route from S409 to S411)
Returning to the description of the determination process in step S409, in step S409, when the setting error flag is in the ON state (5AH), that is, when a setting error error is occurring (step S409: = 5AH), the special electric combination in step S410 The random number determination process (winning lottery) for determining the object operation is skipped, and the special stop symbol creation process in step S411 is executed. That is, when a setting abnormality error occurs, the winning lottery at the start of fluctuation is not executed, and the winning lottery result this time is always processed as "loss" (forced loss control). In the case of a setting abnormality error, it is preferable to provide a fluctuation pattern dedicated to the error and select it, but it may be configured so that a specific existing fluctuation pattern is selected. When selecting an existing fluctuation pattern, consider that a serious error called "setting error" has occurred, do not select a reach fluctuation pattern type that fuels the expectation of winning, but only the normal fluctuation pattern type. It is preferable to select. In the situation of forced loss, it no longer makes sense for the game, so it is preferable to select the long fluctuation pattern type, and more preferably, the longest normal fluctuation pattern (normal fluctuation 16s in this embodiment). Select only. Further, in the case of a setting abnormality error, the configuration may be such that the symbol variation display game itself is not started (the symbol variation is not started) as "the game cannot be continued". In this case, the error notification is continued until the power of the game machine is turned off. In the present embodiment, the error notification continues even if the power is turned on again until the setting change process (step S023) shown in FIG. 6 is executed and the setting abnormality error is cleared.

<11. Game state transition preparation process: Fig. 11>
Next, the game state transition preparation process (step S412) in FIG. 12 will be described. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing details of the game state transition preparation process.

In FIG. 11, the CPU 201 first acquires the jackpot determination flag and determines the state of the jackpot determination flag (step S431). When the jackpot determination flag is in the OFF state (= 00H) (step S431: ≠ 5AH), the game state transition preparation process is exited without doing anything.

(If you win the jackpot)
When the jackpot determination flag is in the ON state (step S431: = 5AH), the "game state transition table selection table" shown in FIG. 21 is acquired (step S432).

(T-5. Game state transition table selection table for big hits: Fig. 21)
FIG. 21 shows a game state transition table selection table. In the game state transition table selection table of the present embodiment, a jackpot game state transition table associated with the game state determination number (YJ) and the special symbol determination data is defined. Specifically, a game state transition table (FIG. 22) is acquired based on the game state determination number (YJ) and special symbol determination data (big hit type), and various data defined in the acquired game state transition table. Is stored in the corresponding state buffer (step S434: state buffer setting process). As shown in FIG. 22, various data for shifting JTTBL-1 to "probability change" and JTTBL-2 to "time saving" are defined in this game state transition table.

The value stored in the buffer is read out in the process of the jackpot end process of FIG. 14 described later (step S509, step S592 of FIG. 15 showing the details thereof), and corresponds to a predetermined storage area of the RAM 203 (corresponding to each buffer). It is stored in the flag storage area or counter storage area). As a result, the game state after the big hit game (the transition destination game state in FIG. 4) is designated.

The roles of the various state buffers are as follows.
(Α) "Public accessory open extension transition state buffer, normal symbol time saving transition state buffer, normal symbol probability change transition state buffer, special symbol time saving state transition state buffer, special symbol probability change transition state buffer"
In these state buffers, ON / OFF (5AH / 00H) designation data of each function for designating the internal gaming state is set. Specifically, the normal symbol time saving function is activated in the general symbol open extension transition state buffer, and the normal symbol time saving transition state buffer is used for the general symbol open extension transition state buffer, which specifies the operating state of the open extension function. The normal symbol time saving state flag that specifies the state, the normal symbol probability change transition state buffer has the normal symbol probability change state flag that specifies the operating state of the normal symbol probability change function, and the special symbol time saving state transition state buffer has the special symbol time saving function. Data for the special symbol probability change state flag that specifies the operation state of the special symbol probability change function is set in the special symbol time reduction state flag that specifies the operation state and the special symbol probability change transition state buffer.
(Β) "Special symbol time reduction counter buffer"
Data for designating the number of time reductions (data for a special symbol time reduction counter) is set (see steps S478 to S481 in FIGS. 13A to 13B).
(Γ) "Special symbol probability variation counter buffer"
Data for designating the number of STs (data for a special symbol probability variation counter) is set (see steps S483 to S486 in FIG. 13B).
(Δ) "Special symbol fluctuation count counter buffer"
Data for designating the number of continuations of a certain fluctuation pattern distribution designation number Tcode (data for a special symbol fluctuation number counter) is set (see steps S488 to S491 in FIG. 13B).
(Ε) "Fluctuating pattern distribution designation number buffer"
When the predetermined update condition is satisfied, the data for specifying the variable pattern distribution designation number Tcode (data for the variable pattern distribution designation number Tcode) to be the update destination is set. The update conditions include when the jackpot is won (step S475 in FIG. 13A, when the jackpot game ends (S592 in FIG. 15), and when the special symbol fluctuation count counter becomes zero.

For example, when the current game state is the "normal state (YJ = 00H)" and the "10R probability change jackpot" is won, the game state transition for the probability change state transition is based on the game state transition table selection table of FIG. The table "JTTBL-1" is acquired. In this case, as shown in FIG. 22, "5AH (ON designation)" is set for each of the general electric accessory open extension transition state buffer to the special symbol probability change transition state buffer, and the special symbol probability change counter buffer is set to "65536 times (effectively)". (Value that guarantees until the next big hit) ”is set, and“ 01H (probability variation designation) ”is set in the fluctuation pattern distribution designation number buffer. As a result, the transition destination game state after the big hit game is designated as the "probability change state". In this embodiment, since the update timing of the variation pattern distribution designation number Tcode is the same as the update timing of the internal gaming state, "0 times" is set in the special symbol variation count counter buffer.

<12. Processing during special symbol change: Fig. 12>
Next, the special symbol changing process (step S307) shown in FIG. 8 will be described. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the details of the special symbol changing process (step S307) of FIG.

In FIG. 12, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not the special symbol accessory operation timer is zero, that is, whether or not the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed (step S451). If the special symbol accessory operation timer is not zero (step S451: NO), the change time of the special symbol has not yet elapsed, that is, the special symbol is changing, so this special symbol change processing is performed without doing anything. Exit.

When the special symbol accessory operation timer becomes zero (step S451: YES), a "fluctuation stop command" indicating that the special symbol has been changed is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 as an effect control command (step S451: YES). S452). By this fluctuation stop command, the effect control unit 24 grasps that the special symbol variation display game has ended after the variation time of the special symbol has elapsed, and stops the decorative symbol currently being displayed in the variation display (confirmed display). As a result, the special symbol variation display game is terminated, and the decorative symbol variation display game is also terminated.

Next, as a setting process when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped, the special symbol confirmation signal output time (for example, 100 ms) is stored in the special symbol confirmation timer of the RAM 203, and the confirmation display time (for example, 500 ms) is stored in the special symbol accessory operation timer. ), Switch the special symbol operation status to "Checking (03H)" (store 03H in the special symbol operation status), store 00H (OFF state) in the special symbol changing flag (step S453), and this. Exit the processing during special symbol change. The above-mentioned "special symbol confirmation signal output time" is a margin time for securing the output time of the special symbol confirmation signal for notifying the hall computer HC from the frame external terminal board 21 that the special symbol has been confirmed and displayed. Is. Further, the "fixed display time" is a time (stop display time) for holding the stop display when the variable display of the special symbol is completed and the special symbol is stopped and displayed. During this fixed display time, the decorative symbol is also fixedly displayed (mainly stopped) (for example, the fixed display period CT in FIG. 29).

After exiting the above special symbol changing process, the special symbol display data update process (step S309) of FIG. 8 is performed, the special symbol management process is exited, and the process proceeds to the special electric accessory management process of step S095 of FIG.

<13. Processing during special symbol confirmation time (processing when fluctuation stops): FIGS. 13A and 13B>
Next, the special symbol confirmation time processing (step S308) will be described. 13A and 13B are flowcharts showing the details of the special symbol confirmation time processing (step S308) of FIG.

In FIGS. 13A and 13B, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not the special symbol accessory operation timer is zero (step S471). A “fixed display time” is set in the special symbol accessory operation timer here (see step S453 in FIG. 12). Until the special symbol accessory operation timer becomes zero (step S471: NO), the process is exited during this special symbol confirmation time without doing anything.

When the special symbol operation timer becomes zero (step S471: YES), it is assumed that the special symbol variation display game has ended, and the special symbol operation status is switched to "waiting (01H)" (special symbol operation). 01H is stored in the status) (step S472), and the game status number YJ is stored (step S473).

Next, the jackpot determination flag is acquired, and the state of the jackpot determination flag is determined (step S474).

(When the jackpot judgment flag is ON)
In the determination in step S474, when the jackpot determination flag is in the ON state (5AH) (step S474: = 5AH), various setting processes are performed when the jackpot symbol is stopped (step S475). Here, as shown in the figure, 00H (OFF state) is stored in the jackpot determination flag, the condition device operation flag is turned ON, and other states are set to a low probability and no electric support state.

(When the jackpot judgment flag is OFF)
In the determination of step S474, when the jackpot determination flag is in the OFF state (00H) (step S474: ≠ 5AH), then it is determined whether or not the special symbol time reduction counter (remaining time reduction) is zero (step). S478). When the special symbol time reduction counter is zero (step S478: YES), the process proceeds to step S483.

On the other hand, when the special symbol time reduction counter (time reduction counter) is not zero (step S478: NO), the special symbol time reduction counter is subtracted by 1 (step S479) as the digestion of the number of fluctuations this time, and the special symbol after subtraction is subtracted. It is determined whether or not the time reduction counter is zero (step S480).

If the special symbol time reduction counter after subtraction is not zero (step S480: NO), the number of end times of the special symbol time reduction state has not been reached, so the process proceeds to step S483 without doing anything. On the other hand, when the special symbol time reduction counter after subtraction is zero (step S480: YES), the setting process at the end of the time reduction is performed (step S481). Here, as the setting process at the end of the time saving, as shown in the figure, the electric chew support function is set to the OFF state, the fluctuation pattern distribution designation number Tcode is set to 00H (normal), and the time saving state is changed to the normal state. Execute the migration setting process of. As a result, in the next special symbol variation display game, the variation pattern of the special symbol based on the "normal state" is selected.

When the setting process at the end of the time reduction in step S481 is completed, the game state information transmission process is then executed (step S482). Here, the game state designation command is transmitted to the effect control unit 24. The game state specification command here includes information for designating the end of the time saving state. By this game state designation command, the effect control unit 24 grasps that the time saving state has ended in this game, and grasps that the normal state is shifted from the next game.

Next, it is determined whether or not the special symbol probability variation counter (remaining ST count) is zero (step S483). If the special symbol probability variation counter is zero (step S483: YES), the process proceeds to step S488. On the other hand, when the special symbol probability variation counter is not zero (step S483: NO), the special symbol probability variation counter is subtracted by 1 (step S484) as the number of fluctuations of the special symbol this time, and the special symbol probability variation after the subtraction is performed. It is determined whether or not the number of times counter is zero (step S485).

If the special symbol probability variation counter after subtraction is not zero (step S485: NO), the ST count has not ended, so the process proceeds to step S488 without doing anything.

When the special symbol probability variation counter after subtraction is zero (step S485: YES), it is assumed that the number of fluctuations of the special symbol has reached the specified ST number (65536 in this embodiment), and the setting process at the end of probability variation is performed. Execute (step S486). Here, as a setting process at the end of the probability change, as shown in the figure, the function related to the probability change state is set to the OFF state, and the transition setting process from the probability change state to the normal state is executed. As a result, in the next special symbol variation display game, the variation pattern of the special symbol based on the "normal state" is selected. When the latent state is provided, the number of STs is monitored in steps S483 to S485 for the latent state as well as the processing of the latent state, and the end timing of the latent state is set in the setting process at the end of the probability change. It is managed.

After completing the setting process at the end of the probability change in step S486, the game state information transmission process is then executed (step S487). Here, as in step S482, the game state designation command is transmitted to the effect control unit 24, but the information included in the game state designation command here includes the end of the high probability state (probability change state or latent state). Contains the information you specify. By this game state designation command, the effect control unit 24 grasps that the high probability state (probability change state or latent probability state) has ended in this game, and grasps that it will shift to the normal state from the next game.

After completing the game state information transmission process in step S487, it is then determined whether or not the special symbol change number counter is zero (step S488). Here, the change timing of the fluctuation pattern distribution designation number Tcode is monitored. In the present embodiment, as described above, since the update timing of the variation pattern distribution designation number Tcode is the same as the update timing of the internal gaming state, the value of the special symbol variation number counter is always zero.

When the special symbol change count counter is zero (step S488: YES), the process is exited during the special symbol confirmation time without doing anything. On the other hand, when the special symbol variation counter is not zero (step S488: NO), the special symbol variation counter is subtracted by 1 (step S489) as the digestion of the current variation, and the special symbol variation counter after the subtraction is subtracted. Determines whether or not is zero (step S490).

If the special symbol change count counter after subtraction is not zero (step S490: NO), it is assumed that it is not the update timing of the fluctuation pattern distribution designation number Tcode, and the process is exited during this special symbol confirmation time without doing anything.

When the special symbol variation number counter after subtraction is zero (step S489: YES), it is assumed that the update timing of the variation pattern distribution designation number Tcode has arrived, and the variation pattern distribution designation number update process is executed (step S491).

Next, the game state information transmission process is executed (step S492). Here, as in step S482, the game state designation command is transmitted to the effect control unit 24, but the information included in the game state designation command here can specify the updated variation pattern distribution designation number Tcode. Contains information.

As described above, when the special symbol change start process is exited, the special symbol display data update process (step S309) of FIG. 8 is performed, the special symbol management process (step S093) is exited, and the special electric accessory management process of FIG. 14 is performed. (Step S095).

<14. Special electric accessory management process: Fig. 14>
Next, the special electric accessory management process (step S095) in FIG. 14 will be described. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the details of the special electric accessory management process in step S095.

In FIG. 14, the CPU 201 then determines the ON / OFF state of the condition device operation flag (step S501). When the condition device operation flag is in the OFF state (step S501: ≠ 5AH), that is, when the jackpot game is not in progress, the special electric accessory management process is exited without doing anything.

When the condition device operation flag is ON (step S501: = 5AH), processing is performed according to the special electric accessory operation status (00H to 04H) (step S502: special electric accessory status branch processing). The "special electric accessory operation status" is a status value indicating the behavior of the special variable winning device 52, and this status value is changed according to the processing state, and the special electric accessory operation status storage area of the RAM in the area is stored. Stored in. The special electric accessory operation status includes "start processing (00H)" that specifies that the state is in the standby state before the start of the big hit game, and "during operation start processing (00H)" that specifies that the state is in the standby state before the start of the round game. 01H) ”,“ Operating (02H) ”which specifies that the round game is being executed, and“ Continuing judgment (03H) ”which specifies that it is being determined whether or not to continue the next round game. , "Big hit end processing (04H)" for designating that the end processing at the end of the big hit game is in progress is included.

In the special electric accessory operation status branching process in step S502, the special electric accessory operation status values are "start processing (00H)", "operation start processing (01H)", "operating (02H)", and "continuation determination" ( One of the processes of steps S505 to S509 is executed depending on whether the status value is any of "03H)" and "Big hit end processing (04H)". These processes are processes for executing and controlling the jackpot game, and the hit games corresponding to various hits are realized through the processes of steps S505 to S509. The processing contents of steps S505 to S509 will be described below.

<Big hit game control process (steps S505 to S509)>
(9-1. Big hit start processing)
The “big hit start process” in step S505 will be described. At the start of the jackpot game, the special electric accessory operation status is set to the initial value of "start processing (00H)". Therefore, when it becomes a "big hit", this "big hit start process" is first executed.

When entering the jackpot start process, the CPU 201 first sets the accessory continuous operation device operation flag to the ON state as the setting process (setting process at the start) required when starting the jackpot game. As a result, the continuous operation (round game) of the special electric accessory becomes an allowable state. Then, the operation status of the special electric accessory is updated to "operation start processing (01H)", and 01H for designating the first 1R is set in the "continuous number counter" for counting the number of rounds. Next, according to the winning type (special symbol judgment data) won this time, the "maximum number of rounds" corresponding to this big hit is set in the corresponding area of the RAM in the area, and the "start interval time" is set in the special symbol accessory operation timer. To set. The "start interval time (start INT)" means that after the confirmation display time of the special symbol has elapsed (see step S471 in FIG. 13A) and the big hit is confirmed, until the special variation winning device 52 is activated (1R round). It is an interval section (until the game starts), and refers to the time width that defines the opening production section.

Next, the "big hit start command" is transmitted to the effect control unit 24, and the big hit start process is exited. The "big hit start command" includes information that can identify the type of the big hit this time and the game state at the time of winning the big hit. When the effect control unit 24 receives this jackpot start command, a series of hit effects (opening effect, during the round, etc.) that are developed during the current jackpot game (during the start INT, between round games, during the round game, during the end INT, etc.) The production, the interval production between rounds, the end production of the round, the ending production, etc.) are decided, and the opening production is started. Thus, the jackpot game is started.

(9-2. Special electric accessory operation start processing)
Next, the “special electric accessory operation start process” in step S506 will be described.

Upon entering the special electric accessory operation start process, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not the special symbol accessory operation timer is zero. The special symbol accessory operation timer here is set to the interval time before the start of the round. As this interval time, in the first round (1st round), the "start interval time (start INT)" set in the above "big hit start processing (step S505)" is monitored, but in the 2nd and subsequent rounds, this processing is performed. When passing through (step S506), the "interval time before opening", specifically, the interval time between rounds (int between Rs) from the end of this round game to the start of the next round game is set. Be monitored. Until this special symbol accessory operation timer reaches zero, this round game has not ended, so the special electric accessory operation start process is exited without doing anything.

On the other hand, if the special symbol accessory operation timer is zero, that is, when the pre-opening interval time (start interval time in the case of the 1st round) has elapsed, the jackpot type (special symbol judgment data) and the current number of rounds (continuous count counter) The opening / closing operation pattern of the large winning opening 50 is set according to the value) (large winning opening opening / closing operation setting process). Here, the large winning opening opening / closing operation time (maximum opening time) is stored in the special symbol accessory operation timer, and the solenoid control data for controlling the large winning opening solenoid 52c (large executed according to the number of rounds). Data for winning opening opening / closing operation pattern) is set.

Further, along with the operation of starting the opening of the large winning opening, a command for opening the large winning opening is transmitted to the effect control unit 24. This "large winning opening opening command" includes the current number of rounds information, and is used when the effect control unit 24 displays the effect during the round corresponding to the number of rounds. Then, the operation status of the special electric accessory is switched to "operating (02H)", and the special electric accessory management process is exited. As a result, the large winning opening 50 is opened up to the opening / closing operation time of the large winning opening, and this round game is started.

(9-3. Processing during operation of special electric accessory)
Next, the “processing during operation of the special electric accessory” in step S507 will be described.

When the special electric accessory is in operation, the CPU 201 first monitors whether or not the number of winning balls in the large winning opening 50 has reached the maximum winning number, and if the maximum winning number is reached, the special symbol combination Clear the object operation timer to zero. As a result, the timer value set in the above "special electric accessory operation start process (step S506)" is forcibly set to zero, and the maximum number of winnings is reached. Will be closed. Further, here, every time there is a prize in the large prize opening 50, a "large winning opening winning command" is transmitted to the production control unit 24. This grand prize opening command includes information on the occurrence of winning in the large winning opening and information on the number of winning balls (the setting value information may also be included), and a prize is notified that the large winning opening 50 has been won. In addition to being used for production, it is also used to control the appearance of setting suggestion effects using prize-winning effects. For example, when there is an over-winning effect that exceeds the maximum number of winnings, a special over-winning effect is displayed instead of the normal over-winning effect according to the appearance rate determined according to the set value.

In addition, do nothing until the special symbol accessory operation timer reaches zero, that is, until the large winning opening opening operation time (maximum opening time) elapses or the maximum winning number is reached. As it is, exit the processing during operation of the special electric accessory.

If the maximum number of prizes is reached or the maximum opening time has elapsed and the special symbol accessory operation timer reaches zero, it is assumed that this round game has ended, and the special electric accessory operation status is set to "Continuing judgment". (03H) ”, and the remaining ball discharge time (1980 ms) is stored in the special symbol accessory operation timer. The "remaining ball discharge time" refers to a margin time for discharging the remaining balls inside the large winning opening after the large winning opening is closed. Further, with the closing of the big winning opening (end of the round game), an interval command between rounds is transmitted to the effect control unit 24. This "inter-round interval command" includes round game end information and current round number information, and is used when the effect control unit 24 displays an inter-round INT effect during inter-round INT. As a result of the above, the processing during operation of this special electric accessory is exited.

(9-4. Special electric accessory operation continuation judgment processing)
Next, the “special electric accessory operation continuation determination process” in step S508 will be described.

When entering the special electric accessory operation continuation determination process, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not the special symbol accessory operation timer is zero. Since the remaining ball discharge time (1980 ms) after the big winning opening is closed is set in the special symbol accessory operation timer here (see step S507), it is determined whether or not the remaining ball discharge time has elapsed. Will be done. Until the special symbol accessory operation timer reaches zero, the special electric accessory operation continuation determination process is exited without doing anything.

When the special symbol accessory operation timer reaches zero (the remaining ball discharge time has elapsed), the value of the continuous number counter is acquired, and it is determined whether or not the current number of rounds has reached the maximum number of rounds. If the maximum number of rounds has not been reached, 1 is added (+1) to the continuous number counter as processing when the round game is continued, and the "interval time before opening" is stored in the special symbol accessory operation timer, and the special electric combination The object operation status is switched to "operation start processing (01H)".

On the other hand, when the current number of rounds reaches the maximum number of rounds, "end INT (end interval time)" is stored in the special symbol accessory operation timer as a setting process at the end of the final round, and the special electric accessory operation status. Is switched to "End processing (04H)". The above-mentioned "end INT" is an interval section from the end of the round game of the final round to the end of the jackpot game after the remaining ball discharge time has elapsed, and refers to a time width in which the ending effect section is defined.

Then, a "big hit end command" instructing the start of the ending effect is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 to exit the special electric accessory operation continuation determination process. As a result, the round game of the maximum number of rounds is completed. The jackpot end command includes information on the current jackpot type and the game state at the time of winning, that is, information capable of identifying the game state after the jackpot game ends, and the effect control unit 24 performs the jackpot game after the jackpot game. It is also used when determining the production mode.

(9-5. Big hit end processing: Fig. 15)
Next, the “big hit end process” in step S509 will be described. FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing the details of the jackpot end processing.

In FIG. 18, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not the special symbol accessory operation timer is zero (step S591). Since the end interval time (end INT) is set in the special symbol accessory operation timer here, it is determined here whether or not this end interval time has elapsed. Until the special symbol accessory operation timer becomes zero (step S591: NO), the jackpot end process is exited without doing anything.

On the other hand, when the special symbol accessory operation timer becomes zero (the end interval time has elapsed) (step S591: YES), the state flag setting process is executed (step S592). Here, each value of the state buffer set in the "game state transition preparation process (step S412 in FIG. 10)" already described is set in the flag area and the counter corresponding to the state buffer, respectively. As a result, the game state after the big hit game is specified.

Next, various setting processes at the end of the big hit are executed (step S593). Here, various data used during the jackpot game control process (for example, the flags and counter values used in steps S505 to S509) are cleared, the game status notification LED output number is updated, and the special electric accessory operation status is changed. Switch to "Start processing (00H)".

When the jackpot end process is completed, a series of control processes related to the jackpot game is completed, and the current jackpot game is completed.

<Variable display operation effect of decorative design: FIGS. 28 to 41>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 28 to 41, a variable display effect of the decorative symbol will be described. The decorative symbol variation display effect is a series of symbol variation display operation modes (decorative symbol variation pattern) from the start of variation of the decorative symbol to the stop display (particularly the final display), and here, the left symbol shown in FIG. , The middle symbol and the right symbol are dealt with in the symbol variation display mode of the three decorative symbols. The variable display effect of the decorative symbol is used as a part of the effect in the pattern variable display game. Unless otherwise required, the variable display effect of the decorative pattern is abbreviated as "decorative pattern effect".

The decorative design effect is used for notifying the reach state (reach effect), the occurrence of pseudo-ream, the final game result (big hit lottery result), and for enlivening the notice effect (notice during change), as well as for the game. It functions as important identification information for notifying the start and end, and can be said to be the core of the decorative pattern variation display game. In other words, the decorative design effect not only enriches the variation of the effect by the display operation, but also makes it difficult to feel stress when the game result ends with a loss, and makes it difficult to feel the occurrence of fluctuating slump. It is considered to be an important production. Therefore, in the present embodiment, it is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of improving the directing effect of the decorative pattern production.

In this embodiment, attention is paid to the time when a lot of players encounter a loss in the progress of the game, and in order to enrich the production variation during the change of the symbol and improve the hitting comfort of the player, the "decorative symbol" executed at the end of the game is executed. The stop operation pattern (stop operation mode of the decorative pattern) "has been devised.

(Outline of decorative design production)
In order to facilitate the understanding of the present invention, first, an outline of the decorative design effect will be described. Here, first, the outline of a series of variable display operations of the decorative symbol will be described with reference to FIG. 28. The "stopping operation pattern of the decorative symbol", which is closely related to the present invention, will be described later with reference to FIG. 29.

FIG. 28 is a timing chart showing an example of a decorative symbol effect (decorative symbol variation pattern) related to the normal variation 13s.

In the decorative symbol production, for example, as shown in "Stop operation long" in FIG. 28 (a), first, three decorative symbols start variable display all at once or separately from the stop display state (confirmed display state), and each of them starts variable display. The decorative symbol starts a "high-speed fluctuation state (hereinafter referred to as" high-speed fluctuation ")" (at 0.5 seconds). During this high-speed fluctuation, each decorative symbol is in a display state that is difficult to identify or cannot be identified, and the transmittance of the decorative symbol is higher than that at the time of stop display. For example, the background image corresponding to the current effect mode is displayed at high speed. It becomes identifiable through the changing decorative pattern.

The above-mentioned "transmittance" means the degree to which other images existing on the back surface of the image can be seen through or the ratio thereof with respect to the image to which the transmittance is set. Specifically, when the transmittance of a certain image is set to 0%, the other images superimposed on the back surface of the image are completely invisible (indistinguishable state), but the transmittance is set to 100%. If so, it becomes completely transparent and only the other image can be seen. Therefore, if the transmittance is set to an appropriate value, the image is displayed as a translucent image according to the transmittance (0% <transmittance A <99%). The transmittance of the above decorative symbol during high-speed fluctuation may be at least higher than the transmittance during low-speed fluctuation described later (transmittance α% during low-speed fluctuation <transmittance β% during high-speed fluctuation). , It is preferable that the other image (background image) superimposed on the back side of the decorative pattern is in a display state having sufficiently distinguishable transparency. In addition, various notice effects are also executed when the decorative design starts to change.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 28 again, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the fluctuation, the stop operation is performed at 9 seconds, 10.5 seconds, and 12 seconds from the start of the fluctuation in the order of "left symbol → right symbol → middle symbol", respectively. Starting, each symbol sequentially starts decelerating from high-speed fluctuation and enters a period of "low-speed fluctuation state (hereinafter referred to as" low-speed fluctuation ")". The period of this low-speed fluctuation is the "slow-down display period (deceleration period)" in which the symbol stops while gradually slowing down, and the transmittance is confirmed and displayed immediately after the start of the stop operation (timing of the start of the stop operation). It is reduced to almost the same (meaning that it includes the same; the same applies hereinafter), and the decorative design is redisplayed in an identifiable state. Therefore, during the low-speed fluctuation period, the transmittance of the decorative symbol is always lower than that during the high-speed fluctuation (transmittance α% during low-speed fluctuation <transmittance β% during high-speed fluctuation). It may be configured so that the transmittance gradually decreases with the progress of.

When the period of the above "slow fluctuation (slow down display)" has elapsed, the period of the "temporary stop state (hereinafter referred to as" temporary stop ")" is entered. In this example, the temporary stop period is sequentially entered at the time points of 10.5 seconds, 11.5 seconds, and 12.5 seconds for each symbol. During this temporary suspension period, the design will "sway". The "temporary stop state" here is different from the temporary stop state of the decorative symbol related to the "pseudo-ream" (temporary stop state before the re-variation display operation of the decorative symbol). The transmittance during the temporary stop is substantially the same as the transmittance during the confirmed display (transmittance during the confirmed display γ% = transmittance δ% during the temporary stop period = approximately 0%), and the design is sufficient. Displayed in an identifiable state. Therefore, the player can clearly grasp what kind of symbol has stopped.

Then, when the temporary stop period elapses (at the time of 13 seconds), the fluctuation time (variation time of the special symbol) ends, and the decorative symbol is confirmed and displayed (fixed display period), whereby a series of decorative symbol effects is produced. The end, that is, the decorative pattern variation display game this time is ended. The fixed display period is a time width provided corresponding to the "fixed display time (500 ms: see step S453 in FIG. 12)" set when the special symbol finishes the fluctuation time, and is the final. It is used as a definite display time for definitively notifying the combination of decorative symbols that are temporarily stopped and displayed. The next decorative symbol variation display game will start after this fixed display period.

Although not shown, to be precise, the speed of the decorative symbol becomes zero at the end of the low-speed fluctuation, and after the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed (for example, 0.3 second stop display: pause period). ), Temporary stop is started. That is, the flow of the basic fluctuation display operation of the decorative symbol in one symbol variation display game is, to be exact, "high-speed fluctuation-> low-speed fluctuation-> pause-> temporary stop-> all symbol confirmation display". Therefore, when referred to as "the symbol that stops first", it means the symbol that ends the low-speed fluctuation first or the symbol that temporarily stops first. In the present specification, in order to simplify the explanation, "the symbol that stops first", "the symbol that stops second", and "the symbol that stops last" are respectively "the symbol that temporarily stops first". , "The symbol that temporarily stops second" and "The symbol that temporarily stops last".

In the following, for convenience of explanation, the above "low speed fluctuation period (slow down display period)" is the "period from the start of the stop operation to the temporary stop", and the low speed fluctuation period is referred to as "stop operation". Sometimes referred to as "period". In addition, the effect during the stop operation period may be referred to as "stop operation effect".

(About the stop operation pattern of the decorative pattern: Fig. 29)
The outline of a series of variable display operations of decorative patterns has been described above. Next, with reference to FIG. 29, a stop operation pattern of the decorative symbol according to the present embodiment will be described.

FIG. 29 is a timing chart focusing on the stop operation pattern (display mode related to the stop operation period) of the decorative symbol. Details will be described later, but in the present embodiment, three stop operation patterns of "stop operation short", "stop operation middle", and "stop operation long" shown in FIGS. 29 (a) to 29 (c) are dealt with. Note that FIG. 29 shows the temporal transition of each symbol in the stop operation pattern of each symbol, with the time point t at which the first stop (temporary stop) starts the stop operation as 0 second. The relational expressions connected by have almost the same meaning). Further, for convenience of explanation, each period related to the decorative symbol effect (variable display operation of the decorative symbol) in FIG. 29 is described as follows.
(B) The period during the stop operation of the left symbol is "LMT during the period during the left stop operation".
(B) The period during the stop operation of the right symbol is "RMT during the right stop operation period".
(C) The period during the stop operation of the middle symbol is "CMT during the middle stop operation".
(D) The temporary suspension period of the left symbol is "Left temporary suspension period LPT".
(E) The temporary suspension period of the right symbol is "Right temporary suspension period RPT".
(F) The temporary suspension period of the middle symbol is "Left temporary suspension period CPT".
(G) The fixed display period (common to all decorative patterns) is set to "fixed display period CT".
(H) The stop operation period (LMT + LPT) of the left symbol is set to "Left stop operation period LST".
(I) The stop operation period (RMT + RPT) of the right symbol is set to "Right stop operation period RST".
(N) The stop operation period (CMT + CPT) of the middle symbol is set to "Middle stop operation period CST".

In the present embodiment, regarding the stop operation pattern, the stop operation period from the time when at least one symbol first starts the stop operation to the time when all the symbols stop (confirmed display) (here, "left stop operation period LST"). A plurality of stop operation patterns having different (corresponding) are provided. The plurality of stop operation patterns are provided with at least stop operation patterns of a first period, a second period, and a third period in which the stop operation periods (stop operation times) are different, and the first period, the second period, and the first period are provided. The stop operation period becomes longer in this order of three periods. Of these, the stop operation pattern of the first period is called "stop operation short", the stop operation pattern of the second period whose stop operation period is longer than the first period is called "stop operation middle", and the stop operation period is The stop operation pattern of the third period, which is longer than the second period, is referred to as "stop operation long". For example, in relation to the stop operation patterns shown in FIGS. 29 (a) to (c), the stop operation pattern having the shortest stop operation period (shortest time) is "stop operation short", and the stop operation period is the longest. The stop operation pattern for the period (maximum time) is "stop operation long", and the stop operation pattern for the stop operation period longer than the stop operation short and shorter than the stop operation long is "stop operation middle".

(Specific example of stop operation short circuit: FIG. 29 (a))
“Stop operation short circuit” will be described with reference to FIG. 29 (a).

As shown in the figure, the "stop operation short" according to the present embodiment starts the stop operation (slow down display) at substantially the same timing for all the symbols on the left, right, and middle (at 0 seconds). After a low-speed fluctuation period of 0.5 seconds (during the stop operation period), all the symbols are temporarily stopped (paused) at substantially the same timing. After that, after a temporary stop (sway fluctuation) for 0.5 seconds, all the symbols are confirmed and displayed (at the time of 1 second). In the case of this stop operation short, all the symbols perform the stop operation all at once, and the confirmation is displayed only after 1 second, so that it seems that the operation is stopped quickly.

(Specific example of stop operation middle: FIG. 29 (b))
Next, the “stop operation middle” will be described with reference to FIG. 29 (b).

The "stop operation middle" according to the present embodiment is different from the above stop operation short, and the stop operation order of each symbol is different. Specifically, as shown in the figure, the stop operation (slow down display) is started in the order of "left symbol-> right symbol-> middle symbol". In the case of the present embodiment, after the left symbol that is stopped (temporarily stopped) first enters the stop operation, the right symbol and the middle symbol sequentially enter the stop operation in the middle of the stop operation of the left symbol (0.5 seconds). (At the time of 1 second), each symbol sequentially enters the temporary stop in the order in which the stop operation is started (see the time points of 1.5 seconds, 2 seconds, and 2.5 seconds in the figure). Then, when 0.5 seconds have passed from the last temporarily stopped middle symbol, all the symbols are confirmed and displayed (at the time of 3 seconds). Therefore, in the case of the stop operation middle, the stop operation period (3 seconds) longer than the stop operation short (1 second), that is, each symbol seems to stop more slowly than the stop operation short. However, in the case of the stop operation middle, each symbol stops at a good tempo because of the stop operation that "in the middle of the stop operation of the symbol that stops first, the other symbols stop in sequence". It's easy to get the feeling of going. In addition, as shown in FIG. 40 (a modified example of the stop operation pattern) described later, each symbol also has a stop operation mode in which the left symbol and the right symbol are temporarily stopped at the same time (left and right simultaneous stop), and then the middle symbol is stopped. Is easy to get the feeling that it stops at a good tempo.

(Specific example of long stop operation: FIG. 29 (c))
Next, the above "stop operation long" will be described with reference to FIG. 29 (c).

In the "stop operation long" according to the present embodiment, the stop operation (slow down display) is started in the order of "left symbol-> right symbol-> middle symbol" in the order of the stop operation of each symbol as in the stop operation middle. It is the same in that it does. However, it differs in the following points. In the case of a long stop operation, the left symbol first enters the stop operation, and then temporarily stops at 1.5 seconds. On the other hand, the right symbol enters the stop operation at 1.5 seconds when the left symbol enters the temporary stop, and then enters the temporary stop at 3 seconds. Further, the middle symbol enters the stop operation at 3 seconds when the right symbol enters the temporary stop, and enters the temporary stop at 3.5 seconds. That is, every time the symbol that started the stop operation first in chronological order enters the temporary stop, the remaining symbols enter the temporary stop, and 0.5 seconds after the last temporarily stopped symbol, that is, the left symbol. All the symbols are confirmed and displayed 4 seconds after the start of the stop operation of. Therefore, when the stop motion long is applied, each symbol seems to stop more slowly than the stop motion middle. Although details will be described later, in the case of a long stop operation, the symbol that is stopped (temporarily stopped) at the end is characterized in that it stops in a shorter time than other symbols.

Relationships when focusing on each period (period LMT, RMT, CMT, LPT, RPT, CPT, LST, RST, CST, etc.) for each of the above stop operation patterns (stop operation short, stop operation middle, stop operation long) Is as shown in FIG. 29, and items that can be derived from this (for example, the relationship between the length of the high-speed fluctuation period, the relationship between the length of the stop operation period, the relationship between the high and low transmittance, and the relationship between the length of the stop operation period). Etc.) are self-evident matters and are included in the scope of the technical idea of the present invention.

As described above, the stop operation short, the stop operation middle, and the stop operation long have different stop operation modes (during stop operation effect modes) of the decorative symbols, and thus can give different impressions in terms of effect.

(Application example of stop operation pattern 1: FIG. 28)
Next, an application example of each stop operation pattern will be described with reference to FIG. 28. FIG. 28 shows an example in which each stop operation pattern (stop operation short, stop operation middle, stop operation long) is executed in the predetermined fluctuation display of the predetermined fluctuation time. Specifically, it is an example in which each stop operation pattern is applied to the decorative symbol effect in a specific normal variation pattern, and here, the decorative symbol effect related to "normal variation 13s" is typically shown.

Since the stop operation period becomes longer in this order for the stop operation short, stop operation middle, and stop operation long, when applied to the fluctuation pattern of the same fluctuation time, as shown in the figure, the high-speed fluctuation period is the stop operation long and stop. The length increases in the order of operation middle and stop operation short. Further, in the case of the stop short in this example, each symbol starts the stop operation at substantially the same timing, temporarily stops at substantially the same timing, and then is fixedly displayed. Therefore, each symbol has a high-speed fluctuation period. , The stop operation period MT (low speed fluctuation period: LMT, RMT, CMT) and the temporary stop period (LPT, RPT, CPT) are substantially the same period.

On the other hand, in the case of the stop operation middle, the right symbol starts the stop operation in the middle of the stop operation of the left symbol that stops first, and the middle symbol that stops last in the middle of the stop operation between the left symbol and the right symbol. Starts the stop operation, so during the period during the left stop operation, the middle symbol is fluctuating at high speed (maintaining translucency with high transmittance), but only the left symbol and the right symbol are slow. There may be overlapping periods that show down display (maintaining semi-transparency with low transmittance), or overlapping periods that show slow-down display for all symbols.

In the case of a long stop operation, the right symbol starts the stop operation at the timing when the left symbol temporarily stops (approximately the same timing), and the middle symbol stops at the timing when the right symbol temporarily stops (approximately the same timing). In order to start the operation, during the left stop operation period LMT, the middle symbol and the right symbol are fluctuating at high speed (maintaining translucency with high transmittance), and during the right stop operation period RMT, only the middle symbol is moving. During high-speed fluctuation (maintaining translucency with high transmittance) (see Fig. (B)). In the case of a long stop operation, the deceleration rate of the middle symbol that stops last is stronger than that of the left symbol or the right symbol, and the middle symbol stops most quickly. What are the left symbol and the right symbol? The deceleration rate is almost the same, and it stops more slowly than the middle symbol. Therefore, in terms of effect, it seems that the middle symbol, which is temporarily stopped last, is quickly temporarily stopped while the left symbol and the right symbol are temporarily stopped. For example, "Ta-n ♪ (temporary stop of the left symbol)-> Ta-n ♪ (temporary stop of the right symbol)-> Tan! (Temporary stop of the middle symbol)". Such a "short stop operation (short-time stop operation) of the final stop symbol" is suitable in a situation where a loss is known, for example, "at the time of non-tempai (non-reach)". The reason is as follows. If the last stopped symbol is slowly stopped when it is not in the reach state, the temporary stop may be unnecessarily long, which may give the player a feeling of frustration, and such a stop operation occurs frequently. This is because the interest in playing games is reduced. Therefore, when the game is not in the reach state, the short stop operation of the final stop symbol is executed to give the player a feeling that the game is progressing at a good tempo. As a result, even if the player sees the stop motion, he / she is less likely to feel excessive stress, and it is possible to produce a decorative pattern that is comfortable for the player to hit.

In addition, in FIG. 28, as a specific normal fluctuation pattern, the decorative symbol effect relating to "normal fluctuation 13s" is typically described, but the specific normal fluctuation pattern may be one or a plurality of types. Further, it can be appropriately determined whether to apply one or a plurality of stop operation patterns among the stop operation patterns. For example, in the case of a short variation pattern (for example, normal variation 4s), only one stop operation pattern (for example, stop operation short) is applied, and a plurality of stop operation patterns (for example, stop operation short) are applied to the long variation pattern. , At least two of stop operation middle and stop operation long) can be applied.

As described above, when each stop operation pattern (stop operation short, stop operation middle, stop operation long) is applied to the same fluctuation pattern, the high-speed fluctuation period may be different depending on the stop operation pattern. The stop operation period can be different. That is, even with the same variation pattern, it is possible to make the stop operation mode (effect during the stop operation) of the decorative symbol different, and it is possible to give a different impression in terms of effect. Taking advantage of such a directing merit, even if the fluctuation pattern is the same, if the stop operation pattern is different according to the effect executed (appearing) during the symbol variation display game, the effect is free. It is possible to improve the degree and variation of the production. This will be described with reference to FIG.

(Example of application of stop operation pattern according to the effect to be executed (effect during stop operation): FIG. 30)
FIG. 30 is a timing chart typically exemplifying the decorative symbol effect related to the normal fluctuation 13s, as in the case of FIG. 28. However, here, depending on the effect to be executed (for example, a notice effect), FIG. It is a timing chart exemplifying the case where the stop operation pattern of the decorative pattern effect is different. FIG. 30 (a) shows a case where “effect A” is executed, FIG. 30 (b) shows a case where “effect B” is executed, and FIG. 30 (c) shows either effect A or effect B. Is not executed (when other effects are executed).

The "Direction A", "Direction B", and "Direction C" in the figure have different production contents, and the execution time (effect time) of the production is also different. The relationship between the length of the production time is "Production A> Production B> Production C".

As shown in FIGS. 30A to 30C, regarding the decorative symbol effect, when the effect A is executed, the "stop operation short" is executed, and when the effect B is executed, the "stop operation middle" is executed. "Is executed, and when the effect A and the effect B are not executed (in this example, it is assumed that the effect C is executed), the" stop operation long "is executed. As described above, the reason why the stop operation pattern is changed according to the effect time (execution time of the effect) is as follows.

The execution time of the decorative symbol variation display game substantially corresponds to the variation time of the special symbol, and the variation time is used to, for example, a notice effect suggesting the winning expectation, a setting suggestion effect, or a mere game. A wide variety of productions are performed, such as productions that do not suggest winning expectations (non-notice productions) such as motifs such as explanations and copyrights (character introduction). However, due to the production time of the effect to be executed, the fluctuation time may not always be used well. Further, if the fluctuation patterns are provided according to all the effects, the types of fluctuation patterns become enormous, which causes an increase in the control load. Therefore, in the present invention, a plurality of stop operation patterns (effects during stop operation) can be executed with one fluctuation pattern, thereby improving the degree of freedom of the effects and realizing various effects, and also reducing the control burden. It can also contribute to mitigation. In particular, it is a major feature that various effects can be produced by using the stop operation pattern even if the fluctuation pattern is relatively short. This will be described in detail below.

As shown in FIG. 30A, when the "effect A" having a relatively long effect time is executed, the effect A may end immediately before the end of the fluctuation time. In this example, the case where the effect A ends at 12 seconds is illustrated. In the case of this example, if the game result (decoration stop symbol) is notified at substantially the same timing as the end of the effect A, there is no sense of discomfort at the end of the effect A, and the sense of discomfort at the end of this game is reduced. However, if the stop operation of the decorative symbol is started during the execution of the effect A, the effect of the effect A being executed and the stop operation of the symbol (effect during the stop operation) are mixed and the effect is diminished, or the game is played. There is a risk of causing confusion. When the stop operation middle or the stop operation long is applied to the effect A, as can be seen from FIGS. 30 (b) and 30 (c), the execution period of the effect A and the stop operation period of the symbol overlap with each other. It leads to the above problems. Therefore, when the effect A (effect time length) is executed, the "stop operation short" having the shortest stop operation period is used among the stop operation patterns.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 30B, when the effect B having a relatively short execution time is executed, the fluctuation time may end with a certain margin (about several seconds) from the end. .. In this example, the case where the effect B ends at 10 seconds is illustrated.

In the case of FIG. 30B, the end timing of the effect B ends about 3 seconds before the end of the fluctuation time, and the 3 seconds are the "effect free time" in which the advance notice effect is not executed, that is, the "effect slump". "Will exist (the time width SRT shown in the figure corresponds to the time width of this effect slump). If the stop operation short is used, there is a risk that the temporary stop state of all the symbols will continue for a while, that is, the production slump will occur and the player will feel stress (increased frustration, etc.). ..

Therefore, when the above-mentioned problem occurs, it is preferable to fill the above-mentioned effect slump time SRT by utilizing the effect during the stop operation. In the case of this example, it is preferable to use "stop operation middle" or "stop operation long" for which the period during stop operation is relatively long. However, it can be said that it is more preferable to use the stop operation middle as shown in the figure in order to avoid the overlap between the execution period of the effect B and the stop operation period of the symbol. In the case of this example, the stop operation of the decorative symbols is started at substantially the same timing as the end of the effect B, and each symbol is sequentially stopped at a good tempo during the effect slump time SRT (stop operation middle). Is executed, there is no sense of discomfort at the end of the effect B, the effect slump is less likely to be felt, and the player is less likely to feel stress.

The case of FIG. 30C illustrates a case in which the effect C is executed with a shorter effect time than the effect A and the effect B as a case in which the effect A and the effect B are not executed. In this case, in consideration of the problems described in FIGS. 30A and 30B (the problem that the execution period of the effect and the stop operation period of the symbol overlap, the problem of the effect slump, etc.), the "stop operation long" is selected. It is preferable to use it. In the long stop operation, the stop operation period (left stop operation period LST: see FIG. 29 (c)) is longer than that in the middle stop operation, so that the high-speed fluctuation period is shorter. Therefore, it is preferable to use the long stop operation in the case of executing "effect C" which is less than the execution time of effect B (the case of "execution time of effect C <execution time of effect B <execution time of effect A"). Is.

As described above, the feature of this example is that even if the fluctuation pattern is the same, the stop operation pattern is different depending on the type of effect to be executed (effect time) and the presence or absence of the effect to be executed. It can be said that it is characterized in that the stop operation pattern is different depending on the timing when the production ends. For example, in FIGS. 30A and 30B, the effect B (first effect) that ends at the first end timing during the predetermined fluctuation time and the second end timing that is later than the first end timing are ended. There is an effect A (second effect), and it is preferable to execute the stop operation short in the case of the effect A and the stop operation middle in the case of the effect B.

(Modification example 1)
In the example of FIG. 30, an example in which the stop operation patterns are different when the effects with different effect times are executed has been described, but even when the same effect is executed, depending on the timing at which the effect ends. Therefore, the stop operation pattern can be changed. For example, in the case of executing a predetermined effect (referred to as "effect K" here) for a certain effect time (for example, 6 seconds), the predetermined variation time of the predetermined variation pattern (here, the normal time 13s is taken as an example). If the start timing of the effect K in the inside is different, the end timing will also be different. Explaining this with reference to FIG. 30, for example, the following cases (I) to (III) can occur.
(I) When the effect K is started from the time point of 6 seconds from the start of the fluctuation, the end timing is the time point of 12 seconds (the case where the effect K ends at the same timing as the end timing of the effect A in FIG. 30A). ,
(II) When the effect K is started from the time of 4 seconds from the start of the fluctuation, the end timing is 10 seconds (the case where the effect K ends at the same timing as the end timing of the effect B in FIG. 30B). ,
(III) When the effect K is started from the time point of 3 seconds from the start of the fluctuation, the end timing is the time point of 9 seconds (the case where the effect K ends at the same timing as the end timing of the effect C in FIG. 30C). ).
In such a case, as in FIG. 30, it is preferable to make the stop operation pattern different according to the end timing of the effect K. Specifically, the stop operation short is applied in the case (I), the stop operation middle is applied in the case (II), and the stop operation long is applied in the case (III). In this way, even when the same effect is executed, if the end timing of the effect is different, the stop operation pattern can be changed according to the end timing.

(Modification 2)
Further, in the example of FIG. 30, when an effect having a different effect time is executed, an example in which a stop operation pattern in which the stop operation period is shorter is applied to the effect in which the effect time is relatively long has been described. However, even when an effect having a relatively short effect time is executed, the end timing may be later than the effect having a long effect time. For example, during the predetermined fluctuation time of the predetermined fluctuation pattern (here, the normal time 13s is taken as an example), the “effect K” with the production time of 6 seconds and the “effect M” with the production time of 7 seconds can be executed. In the case of, for example, the following cases (IV) and (V) can occur.
(IV) When the effect K is started from the time point of 6 seconds from the start of the fluctuation, the end timing is the time point of 12 seconds (the case where the effect ends at the same timing as the end timing of the effect A in FIG. 30 (a)). ,
(V) When the effect M is started from the time point of 3 seconds from the start of the fluctuation, the end timing is 10 seconds (the case where the effect ends at the same timing as the end timing of the effect B in FIG. 30B). ). In this case, the stop operation short is applied in the case of (IV) above, and the stop operation middle is applied in the case of (V) above, that is, the stop operation middle is applied when the effect M having an early end timing is executed. When the effect K whose end timing is late is executed, the stop operation middle can be applied. Therefore, the stop operation short can be applied even if the effect K has a relatively short effect time, and the stop operation middle can be applied even if the effect M has a relatively long effect time. In this way, when different effects are executed, the stop operation pattern can be changed according to the timing at which each effect ends.

Regarding the "points in which the stop operation pattern is different depending on the timing at which the effect ends" described in FIG. 30, Modification 1, Modification Example 2, and the like, the reach stop operation pattern (see, for example, FIG. The same can be said for. That is, the reach stop operation pattern can be changed according to the timing at which the effect ends.

As described above, in the present embodiment, even if the fluctuation pattern is the same, the stop operation pattern is different depending on the type of effect (effect time) to be executed. This makes it possible to deal with many effects (effect scenarios) with one variation pattern (variation time). As a result, it is possible to greatly contribute to the improvement of the degree of freedom of the production, the improvement of the production variation, and the reduction of the control burden. In addition, the following configurations (δ1) to (δ4) can be used.

(Δ1) The effect A, the effect B, and the effect C may be regarded as an effect scenario including one or a plurality of types of effects. Further, any of the effects A, B, and C may be any effect as long as it is performed during the symbol variation. Can be adopted.

(Δ2) Each of the effect A, the effect B, and the effect C can be one or a plurality of types of effects. For example, "Direction A is" Production α + Production β ", Production B is" Production γ + Production δ ", and Production C is" Production ε + Production ζ "(Production α to Production ζ have different effects and the same number of types of production. ) ”And“ Production A is “Direction α + Production β + Production γ”, Production B is “Production δ + Production ε”, and Production C is “Production ζ” (Production α to Production ζ are different productions and number of types of production. For example, the effect A can be "effect α + effect β", the effect B can be "effect α + effect γ", and the effect C can be "effect α + effect δ" (each). In the productions A to C, at least one production is the same production, but the effects are different as a whole). For example, there is a case where the effect α is a pseudo-ream and the effect β to the effect δ are different effects. Further, for example, the effect A, the effect B, and the effect C can be a "step-up effect" including the effect steps of a plurality of stages (for example, the effects SU1 to SU3). Specifically, production A is "directing SU1 + directing SU2 + directing SU3" (developed to the final stage), directing B is "directing SU1 + directing SU2" (developing to two stages), and directing C is "directing SU1" (developing to the first stage). Ends with).

(Δ3) The effects A, B, and C have been described on the premise of satisfying the relationship of "execution time of effect C <execution time of effect B <execution time of effect A". The operation pattern may be different. In any case, the degree of freedom and variation of the production can be improved.

(Δ4) The “effect B” or “effect C” whose production time is relatively short is preferably a “player participation type production”. The player participation type production uses the operation means (effect button 13 and cross key 75), and it is easy to leave a lingering sound of the production during operation, and it is possible to make it difficult to feel the presence of the production slump. The reason is that even if this occurs, it can be dealt with by the middle stop operation or the long stop operation.
The above (δ1) to (δ5) are the same in FIGS. 31 to 41 described later.

(When the same effect is executed with fluctuation patterns with different fluctuation times: FIGS. 31 and 32)
Further, as shown in FIG. 31 or 32, when the same effect is executed in the fluctuation patterns having different fluctuation times, the stop operation pattern can be set according to each fluctuation pattern.

In this example, when the same effect (one or a plurality of effects are the same) is executed in a plurality of variation patterns having different variation times, in the case of a variation pattern in which the variation time is relatively long (for example, variation time 16s). , A decorative symbol effect with a relatively long stop operation pattern (for example, long stop operation) is executed, and in the case of a fluctuation pattern with a relatively short fluctuation time (for example, fluctuation time 13s), It is possible to execute a decorative symbol effect accompanied by a stop operation pattern (for example, stop operation short or stop operation middle) in which the period during the stop operation is relatively short. Specific examples of this example are shown in FIGS. 31 and 32.

In FIG. 31, when the effect A is executed, the longest normal fluctuation “normal fluctuation 16s” is set as “stop operation long”, the fluctuation time is shorter than the longest normal fluctuation, and the shortest normal fluctuation is normal fluctuation 4s. “Normal fluctuation 13s”, which has a longer fluctuation time than that, indicates a case in which “stop operation middle” or “stop operation short” is set.

That is, when the same effect is executed in a plurality of fluctuation patterns having different fluctuation times, in the case of a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time is relatively long (here, the fluctuation time is 16s), the stop operation has the longest stop operation period. A decorative pattern effect with a pattern (long stop operation) can be executed, and in the case of a variation pattern (here, the variation time 13s) in which the variation time is relatively short, the stop operation during the stop operation is relatively short. It is a configuration in which a decorative pattern effect accompanied by a pattern (for example, a stop operation short and / or a stop operation middle) can be executed.

Further, in FIG. 32, when the effect A is executed, the longest normal fluctuation "normal fluctuation 16s" is set to "stop operation long" or "stop operation middle", and the fluctuation time is shorter than the longest normal fluctuation. In addition, in the case of "normal fluctuation 13s" in which the fluctuation time is longer than the normal fluctuation 4s of the shortest normal fluctuation, the case of "stop operation short" is shown.

That is, when the same effect is executed in a plurality of fluctuation patterns having different fluctuation times, in the case of a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time is relatively long (here, the fluctuation time is 16s), the period during the stop operation is relatively long. A decorative symbol effect with a stop motion pattern (for example, stop motion long and / or stop motion middle) can be executed, and in the case of a fluctuation pattern with a relatively short fluctuation time (here, fluctuation time 13s), stop. It is a configuration that can execute a decorative pattern effect with a stop operation pattern (stop operation short) with the shortest period during operation.

In the examples of FIGS. 31 and 32, when the effect A is executed, the effect slump time (time width SRT in the figure) occurs on the side of the normal variation 16s, which has a long variation time. In such a case, in view of the problems described in FIGS. 30A and 30B (the problem that the execution period of the effect and the stop operation period of the symbol overlap, the problem of the effect slump, etc.), FIG. 31 ( As shown in a) (c) or FIGS. 32 (a) and 32 (c), it is preferable to use "stop operation long" in the case of normal fluctuation 16s and "stop operation short" in the case of normal fluctuation 13s. It can be said that. In this way, even if the same effect is executed for the fluctuation patterns of different fluctuation times, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable. In addition, the degree of freedom of production can be increased. It should be noted that FIG. 33 shows a summary of the decorative design effects shown in FIGS. 30, 31 and 32 for easy comparison.

(Other application example A: FIG. 34)
In FIG. 30 described above, a configuration capable of executing different stop operation patterns (stop operation short, stop operation middle, stop operation long) has been described depending on the type of effect to be executed and the presence or absence thereof. On the premise of the configuration of FIG. 30, it is preferable to use the configuration shown in FIG. 34 according to the type of effect to be executed and the presence or absence thereof.

With reference to FIG. 34, in this example, in the case of the first fluctuation pattern (for example, fluctuation time 13s) in which the fluctuation time is relatively long, the “stop operation pattern of type number A (for example,“ stop operation short ”” “ Of the decorative symbol effects with "stop operation middle" and "stop operation long"), any of the decorative symbol effects can be executed (see FIGS. 34 (a) to 34 (c), FIG. 30).
In the case of the second fluctuation pattern (for example, fluctuation time 4s) in which the fluctuation time is relatively short, "stop operation pattern of type number B less than type number A (for example," stop operation short "and" stop operation middle " Of the decorative symbol effects accompanied by "two types of") ", an embodiment in which any of the decorative symbol effects can be executed is shown (see FIGS. 34 (d) and 34 (e)).

The number of types B may satisfy the relationship of "number of types B <number of types A", and it is free to adopt any of the stop operation short, stop operation middle, and stop operation long. However, in the case of the second variation pattern, it is preferable that the decorative symbol effect is executed excluding the stop operation pattern having the longest stop operation period among the decorative symbol effects executed in the first variation pattern. For example, in the case of normal fluctuation 13s, when any one of "stop operation short, stop operation middle, stop operation long" is executed, in the case of normal fluctuation 4s, "stop operation short, stop operation middle excluding stop operation long" is executed. It is a configuration that can execute any of. When the second fluctuation pattern is an "extremely short fluctuation pattern" such as "normal fluctuation 4s", the period during the stop operation is the shortest in order to give the player the feeling that the game is progressing at a good tempo. It is preferable to execute only the stop operation short of.

(Example in which the stop operation pattern differs depending on the production stage: FIG. 35)
Further, in FIG. 30 described above, even if the fluctuation patterns are the same, different stop operation patterns (stop operation short, stop operation middle, The configuration that can execute the stop operation long) was explained. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and different stop operation patterns can be configured to be executable depending on the effect stage. This will be described with reference to FIG. 35.

FIG. 35 shows a case in which different stop operation patterns are executed according to the effect stage even if the fluctuation patterns are the same.

FIG. 35 is a timing chart typically showing a decorative symbol effect related to the normal variation 13s, and shows a case where different stop operation patterns are executed according to the effect stage. FIG. 35 shows a stop operation pattern executed in the effect stages A to C. Specifically, FIG. 35 (a) shows a decorative symbol effect accompanied by a "stop operation short" when the effect stage A is set, and FIG. 35 (b) shows a decorative pattern accompanied by a "stop operation middle" when the effect stage B is used. The effect, FIG. 35 (c) shows a case where a decorative pattern effect accompanied by a “long stop operation” is executed in the case of the effect stage C.

First, in order to facilitate the understanding of this example, the outline of the "directing stage" will be described. The "production stage" is different from the production state ("normal production mode", "probability variation production mode", "time saving production mode", etc.) in which the transition is performed along with the transition of the game state managed by the main control unit 20 side. , It is an effect state in which the transition is controlled by the effect process on the effect control unit 24 side, and may continue over one or a plurality of games. Therefore, even if the effect stage is changed, the game state itself managed by the main control unit 20 is not changed, the selection target of the fluctuation pattern is the same, and when the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol is determined. The "variable pattern distribution table selection table (FIG. 23)" and the "variable pattern distribution table (FIGS. 24 to 25)" referred to in the above are not changed. For example, when the current gaming state is the "normal state", even if the production stages are different (in this example, the production stages A to C), the hit variation pattern distribution tables FB1 to FB2 and the loss variation pattern distribution The fluctuation pattern is determined by referring to the fluctuation pattern distribution table of any of the tables FH1 to FH7 (see FIGS. 23 to 25). However, it is possible to display the effects related to each of the effect stages A to C by the effect control on the effect control unit 24 side. For example, even if the setting is changed from "production stage A to production stage B", the selection target of the fluctuation pattern is the same and the exact same fluctuation pattern can be selected, but different productions can be executed depending on the production stage. Is. For example, when the normal variation 13s is selected, the effect stage A executes the “effect A”, but the effect stage B executes another effect (for example, the effect B) without executing the “effect A”. Is. In this example, all of the production stages A to C have the same variation pattern to be selected (the point that exactly the same variation pattern can be selected), and the effect can be executed according to each production stage. Focusing on this, we are trying to increase the degree of freedom and variation of the production by making the stop operation pattern of the decorative pattern different according to the production stage.

A typical production stage is, for example, a "customization function" that allows a player to switch to a desired production stage by operating an operation means (effect button 13 or direction key 75) while waiting for a customer. is there. For example, when the current gaming state is the "normal state", the normal production modes are "normal mode (production stage A)", "simple mode (production stage B)", and "premium mode (production stage C)". This is a function that allows one of three types of production stages (player-selectable production stages) to be selected. What should not be confused is that these effect stages are in the effect state under the same variation pattern selection mode (Tcode), and the player side can freely switch the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) itself. It's not a thing. Therefore, depending on the difference between normal, simple, and premium modes, some or all of the effects that appear may differ, but the selection target of the variation pattern of the special symbol does not change internally.

For example, "normal mode" is the default effect state, and "simple mode" is an effect state in which the appearance rate of a specific notice effect is lower than that of the normal mode or does not appear at all (specific notice effect appearance rate). Change mode). In the "simple mode", for example, the appearance rate at the time of losing a specific high expectation notice effect (for example, the winning expectation of 30% in the normal mode) with a relatively high winning expectation is lower than that in the normal mode. , When the specific high expectation notice appears, the winning expectation is greatly increased, and the appearance rate of the player participation type production is lower than that in the normal mode. Also, in the "premium mode", the appearance rate of winning productions (for example, productions with a winning expectation of 90% or a big hit winning confirmation) is higher than in normal mode and simple mode, and one or more types of specific low The appearance rate of the expectation notice is low (including 0%). Therefore, even if the fluctuation pattern is the same, the type of effect (preliminary effect, non-advanced effect, pre-reading notice during change, setting suggestion effect, etc.) to be executed during the symbol change and whether or not the effect is executed according to the effect stage , It is possible to make different types of pending change notices and whether or not they are executed.

In addition, in each of the normal, simple, and premium production stages, a unique background display corresponding to each production stage appears in order to be able to identify which stage is being performed. For example, "normal mode (directing stage A)" has a background image reminiscent of "morning", "simple mode" has a background image reminiscent of "day", and "premium mode" has a background image reminiscent of "night". is there. For example, if the current state is normal, the background display of the base will be the seasonal "spring" background display in the normal production mode, and "spring morning background" and "spring daytime background" will be displayed according to the normal, simple, and premium production stages. , It is changed to the background display expressing "spring night background".

Further, the production stage may be configured so that the transition (change) can be controlled by the above-mentioned customization function, or a plurality of types of production stages may be configured to be transition controllable by another transition trigger (change trigger). .. For example, a specific symbol variation display game may be executed. Specifically, after a predetermined start condition is satisfied (for example, after a big hit game, after turning on the power, or after clearing the RAM (including setting change)), a predetermined number of symbol variation display games and a predetermined number of symbols For example, every time a variable display game is executed. In this case, it may be decided whether or not to shift to the production stage by a predetermined lottery. Further, a predetermined transition lottery may be executed for each symbol variation display game, and the production stage may be shifted when the game is won. Further, the production stage may be shifted when a specific production is executed. For example, when a stage change effect is executed, a specific reach effect (for example, a high expectation reach effect (developed SPSP reach or a direct hit type SPSP reach, etc.)) causes a loss. In addition, the production stage of the transition destination may be shifted according to a predetermined order, or may be determined by a predetermined lottery. Regarding the transition opportunity of the production stage, one or more conditions are adopted, and when the transition opportunity arrives (when the transition stage transition condition is satisfied), the transition from one production stage to another production stage is performed. Can be (changed). Such transition control of the effect stage is performed by an effect process (effect mode transition means) independently performed by the effect control unit 24 side.

FIG. 35 shows an example in which the stop operation pattern differs depending on the effect stage even if the fluctuation pattern is the same, but when the stop operation pattern is determined according to the effect stage, it differs depending on the effect stage. It is preferable to determine the stop operation pattern by paying attention to the point that the effect can be executed. Here, in order to simplify the explanation, typically, “Direction A, Production B, Production C (Relationship of production time =“ Production C <Production B <Production A ”)” described with reference to FIG. This will be explained using three types of effects. For example, in the production stage A, "production A (long production time)" is likely to be executed, in the production stage B, "production B (medium production time)" is likely to be executed, and in the production stage C, "production C (production time)" is easily executed. If there is a relationship between the production stages that "is short)" is easy to be executed (neither the production A nor the production B is executed), in short, depending on the production stage, the production A, the production B, and the production C The execution probabilities (including zero) are different from each other. For example, there is a case where one or a plurality of effects having a relatively long effect time are easily executed in the order of effect stages A, B, and C. In such a case, it is preferable to determine the stop operation pattern according to the effect mode (effect time of the effect that is easy to be executed) that is easy to be executed under each effect stage. In this case, it is preferable that the stop operation is short in the case of the effect stage A, the stop operation is middle in the case of the effect stage B, and the stop operation is long in the case of the effect stage C (FIG. 37 described later). The same applies to the reach stop operation of).

The stop operation pattern may be fixed according to the effect stage, but the execution probability of each stop operation pattern may be different depending on the effect stage. For example, when determining the decorative pattern effect (variable pattern of the decorative pattern), one of stop operation short, stop operation middle, and stop operation long may be determined according to a predetermined selection rate according to the current effect stage. Good. Specifically, the selection rate of "stop operation short, stop operation middle, stop operation long" is "60%, 30%, 10%" in the production mode A, and "20%," in the production mode B. "50%, 30%", in the case of effect mode C, "10%, 30%, 60%" and the like.

(About the stop operation pattern in the reach fluctuation pattern: FIG. 36)
In FIGS. 28 to 35, the stop operation pattern of the decorative symbol has been described mainly focusing on the normal fluctuation pattern. The stop operation pattern of the decorative symbol in the reach variation pattern will be described below.

FIG. 36 shows an example in which, in the same reach variation pattern, the stop operation pattern of the decorative symbol before the reach state is formed differs depending on the type of effect executed during the symbol variation and whether or not the effect is executed. It is a timing chart. However, since the stop operation pattern dealt with here is a stop operation pattern related to the reach fluctuation pattern, it is a stop operation pattern focusing on "a stop operation pattern of a symbol other than the last stopped symbol". That is, the stop operation pattern of the left symbol and the right symbol (reach configuration symbol) forming the reach state (tempai state) is dealt with. Hereinafter, unless otherwise required, the stop operation pattern of the symbol used when forming the reach state is referred to as a "reach stop operation pattern". Regarding the reach stop operation patterns, the reach stop operation patterns corresponding to the stop operation short, the stop operation middle, and the stop operation long are referred to as "reach stop operation short", "reach stop operation middle", and "reach stop operation long", respectively. ..

In FIG. 36, each reach stop operation pattern (stop operation short, stop operation middle, stop operation long) is executed in a predetermined variation display of a predetermined variation time (variation display of a decorative symbol related to a specific reach variation pattern). An example is shown. Specifically, it is a timing chart showing a part of the decorative symbol effect related to a specific reach variation pattern, and a case where different reach stop operation patterns are executed according to the type of effect executed during the symbol variation. It is shown. FIG. 36 (a) shows a case where "effect D" is executed, FIG. 36 (b) shows a case where "effect E" is executed, and FIG. 36 (c) shows either effect D or effect E. Also indicates a case where it is not executed (when another effect is executed).

In addition, "Direction D", "Direction E", and "Direction F" in the figure have different production contents, and the execution time (production time) of the production is also different. .. The relationship between the length of the production time is "Production D> Production E> Production F". To put it simply, the relationship between the effects D and the effect F corresponds to the relationship between the effects A and the effect C in FIG. Further, as an example of a specific reach fluctuation pattern, a fluctuation pattern that typically belongs to the "SP reach-designated reach fluctuation pattern" (in the figure, it is expressed as "reach fluctuation A" for the sake of simplicity) is shown. There is. The specific reach variation pattern may be another reach variation pattern (N reach, advanced SPSP reach, direct SPSP reach, etc.), or may be one or more types of reach variation patterns.

First, an outline of a series of effects during change (variation pattern of decorative symbol + notice effect scenario) due to reach variation A shown in FIG. A predetermined effect (effects D to E in FIG. 36) is executed during the high-speed fluctuation period, and after the left symbol and the right symbol perform a predetermined stop operation, a reach (tempai) state is formed (time t (variation)). Elapsed time from the start) = 15 seconds). At this time, the "tempai effect" for notifying the reach is executed (t = 15 seconds to 16.5 seconds). The content and production time of this tempai production differ depending on the reach type, and here we explain an example of SP reach type reach, so for example, the title notice related to this SP reach and the SP that fuels the development of SP reach A fanning effect is performed. Then, after finishing the tempai effect, a predetermined SP reach effect (16.5 seconds or later (not shown)) corresponding to the reach variation A is executed, and when the variation time ends, a predetermined stop according to the game result is executed. All decorative symbols are confirmed and displayed in the display mode.

As shown in FIGS. 36 (a) to 36 (c), when the effect D is executed, the “reach stop operation short” is executed, and when the effect E is executed, the “reach stop operation middle”, the effect D and the effect. When E is not executed (in this example, it is assumed that the effect F is executed), the "reach stop operation long" is executed. As described above, the reason for executing different reach stop operation patterns according to the type of effect to be executed is basically the same as the content already described with reference to FIG. 30.

That is, as shown in FIG. 36A, when the effect D having a relatively long execution time is executed, the effect D may end immediately before the reach. In this example, the case where the effect D ends at 14.5 seconds is illustrated. In this case, if the reach state is notified at substantially the same timing as the end of the production D, the player can enjoy the game while expecting a high-expectation reach such as SP reach without feeling the production slump. .. In particular, in the reach stop operation short, when the reach state is formed, the "left and right simultaneous tempai" is executed in which the left symbol and the right symbol are stopped (temporarily stopped) at substantially the same timing. This left and right simultaneous tempai has a stronger impact than the "left and right extraordinary tempai" in which the left and right symbols stop in sequence to form a reach state, and is also used as a warning effect suggesting that the winning expectation is high.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 36B, when the effect E having a relatively short execution time is executed, there is a certain amount of margin time (about 1 to 2 seconds) than the reach timing (tempai timing). There are cases where it ends. In this example, the case where the effect E ends at 13 seconds is illustrated. In this case, the end timing of the effect E ends about 2 seconds before the tempai timing, and a "effect slump" of 2 seconds can occur (time width SRT in the figure). In particular, in the high-expectation reach production of the SP reach system, the advance notice production with a higher expectation of winning than in the case of normal fluctuation is executed with a high probability by the tempai timing, and therefore, the game "will take reach". In many cases, the expectation of winning a person is fueled. Under such a situation, if the "reach stop operation short" shown in FIG. 36A is used, the period (effect slump time) for which the temporary stop state of all the symbols continues will be long. As a result, the player may feel that there is a waiting time until the start of the tempai production, which may cause stress.

Therefore, it is preferable to fill the effect slump time by using the stop operation mode (effect during stop operation) of "reach stop operation middle" or "reach stop operation long" for which the period during stop operation is relatively long. In the present embodiment, in order to avoid overlapping the execution period of the effect E and the stop operation period of the symbol, the “reach stop operation middle” is used as shown in the figure. In the case of this example, the stop operation of the decorative symbols is started at substantially the same timing as the end of the effect E, and during the effect slump time SRT, each symbol forms a reach state while sequentially stopping at a good tempo, so that all the symbols The number of states in which the temporary stop state continues for a while is reduced, and the player is less likely to feel stress.

The case of FIG. 36C illustrates a case in which the effect F is executed with a shorter effect time than the effect D and the effect E as a case in which the effect D and the effect E are not executed. In this case, in consideration of the problems described in FIGS. 36 (a) and 36 (b) (the problem that the execution period of the effect and the stop operation period of the symbol overlap, the problem of the effect slump, etc.), the "stop operation long" is selected. It is preferable to use it. Since the reach stop operation long has a longer stop operation period than the reach stop operation middle, the high-speed fluctuation period becomes shorter. Therefore, it is preferable to use the reach stop operation long in the case of executing "effect F" which is less than the execution time of effect E.

In addition, as can be seen from the illustration, the characteristic point of this example is that the tempai timings of the reach stop operation short, the reach stop operation middle, and the reach stop operation long are the same (substantially the same) timing. (The same applies to FIG. 37 described later). Here, the end of the period during the stop operation (at the end of the slowdown display) of the second stopped symbol (right symbol) is set as the tempai timing (t = 15 seconds) (in the figure (a), the left and right simultaneous tempais are used. There are left and right symbols that stop first). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and any timing during the above "pause period (not shown)" may be used as the tempai timing. For example, at the end of the stop operation period (at the start of the pause period), at the end of the pause period (at the time of temporary stop of the symbol to be stopped second (right symbol)), and the like (the same applies to FIG. 37 described later). ).

In this example, even if the reach variation pattern is the same, the reach stop operation pattern can be different depending on the type (effect time) of the effect executed before the reach. Further, even if the execution time of the effect executed before the reach is different, the tempai timing can be set to the same timing in each reach stop operation pattern. This makes it possible to handle many pre-reach effects with one reach variation pattern, and it is easy to adjust the range of effects after reach (tempai effect, reach effect, etc.), old and new models. It can greatly contribute to the improvement of design compatibility with and convenience, reduction of control load, improvement of freedom of production, improvement of production variation, and the like.

When the reach effect is executed, a high-expectation notice effect (including a look-ahead notice) and a low-expectation notice effect (including a look-ahead notice) can be executed according to the winning expectation. Therefore, the reach stop operation pattern can be different depending on whether the high-expectation notice effect is executed or the low-expectation notice effect is executed. When a high-expectation notice effect is executed, the liveliness and agitation of the effect become stronger (for example, a plurality of advance notice effects occur in combination, and the execution time of the notice effect often becomes long. ), For example, perform a decorative symbol effect with a reach stop motion pattern other than at least a reach stop motion long (for example, apply a reach stop motion middle or a reach stop motion short). On the other hand, when the low-expectation notice effect is executed, paying attention to the fact that the liveliness and the degree of fanning of the effect are relatively weaker than when the above-mentioned high-expectation notice effect is executed, at least the reach is stopped. Execute a decorative symbol effect (for example, apply reach stop operation middle or reach stop operation long) with a stop operation pattern other than the operation short. Of course, it is up to you what kind of reach stop operation pattern to apply according to the degree of expectation of winning the notice effect. In any case, the reach stop operation pattern can be made different depending on the winning expectation of the advance notice effect to be executed.

(Example of different reach stop operation patterns depending on the production stage: Fig. 37)
In FIG. 36 described above, even with the same reach variation pattern, a configuration capable of executing different reach stop operation patterns depending on the type of effect executed during the symbol variation and whether or not the effect is executed has been described. Here, a configuration example capable of executing different reach stop operation patterns according to the effect stage will be described.

FIG. 37 shows a case in which different reach stop operation patterns are executed depending on the effect stage even if the reach variation patterns are the same. FIG. 37 (a) shows a decorative symbol effect accompanied by a "reach stop operation short" when the effect stage A is set, and FIG. 37 (b) shows a decorative symbol effect accompanied by a "reach stop operation middle" when the effect stage B is displayed. 37 (c) shows a case where a decorative symbol effect accompanied by a “reach stop operation long” is executed in the case of the effect stage C. The production stages A to C in FIG. 37 are the same as the production stages A to C in FIG. 35.

As shown in the figure, the characteristic point of this example is that even if the reach fluctuation pattern is the same, the reach stop operation pattern differs depending on the production stage, but the tempai timing of each stop operation pattern is the same (substantially the same) timing. (Refer to the time point when the elapsed time from the start of fluctuation = 15 seconds). The point that "the tempai timing is the same regardless of the reach stop operation pattern" is the same as the example described in FIG. 36. Note that FIG. 37 is different from FIG. 36 in that the reach stop operation pattern differs depending on the production stage, and other contents (matters related to the tempai production, etc.) are substantially the same. In this example, even if the reach variation pattern is the same, the reach stop operation pattern can be different depending on the production stage. Further, the tempai timing of each reach stop operation pattern can be set to the same timing regardless of the production stage. As a result, it is possible to greatly contribute to the improvement of the degree of freedom of the production related to the production stage and the improvement of the production variation.

(Modification example of stop operation pattern: FIGS. 38 to 41)
In the above embodiment, the stop operation pattern shown in FIG. 29 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the stop operation pattern shown in FIGS. 38 to 41 may be adopted. In FIGS. 38 to 41, the maximum stop operation period of the stop operation pattern (the period from when the first stopped symbol starts the stop operation until the last stopped symbol stops and is confirmed and displayed), that is, , Left stop operation period It is divided as follows according to the time width of LST.
(Τ1) Stop operation short: 0 ≤ LST <2 seconds (τ2) Stop operation middle: 2 seconds ≤ LST <4 seconds (τ3) Stop operation long: 4 seconds ≤ LST

In this embodiment, the stop operation pattern types are classified as described in (τ1) to (τ3) above, but when there are a plurality of stop operation pattern types belonging to the same stop operation pattern type, for example, the stop operation middle type is used. If there is a first stop operation middle and a second stop operation middle to which it belongs, the one with a relatively short left stop operation period LST is treated as a "stop operation short", and the left stop operation period LST is relatively. The longer one can be treated as "stop operation middle". Specifically, the stop operation middle B (LST = 3.0s) in FIG. 38, the stop operation middle D (LST = 3.5s) in FIG. 39, and the stop operation middle E (LST = 2.5s) in FIG. 40. If so, the stop operation middle E can be treated as "stop operation short", the stop operation middle D can be treated as "stop operation middle", and the stop operation middle B can be treated as "stop operation long".

Hereinafter, each stop operation pattern shown in FIGS. 38 to 41 will be described.

In the stop operation short B shown in FIG. 38 (a), the period during the stop operation of each symbol is zero (LMT = RMT = CMT = 0 (substantially zero)), there is no low-speed fluctuation period, and the high-speed fluctuation period ends. Immediately after that, each symbol is temporarily stopped. Therefore, it seems that the three decorative symbols are suddenly stopped and displayed at substantially the same time after the three decorative symbols fluctuate at high speed for a while. For example, "Don! (Temporary stop of all symbols)". In particular, this stop operation short B has a shorter stop operation period than other stop operation patterns (stop operation patterns shown in FIGS. 29, 38 (b) and (c) and 39 to 41, which will be described later) (this). In the example, it ends with LST = 0.5 seconds), and when applied to the same fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time), the biggest feature is that the longest high-speed fluctuation period can be created among all operation patterns. is there. It is preferable to use such a stop operation pattern for an effect having a relatively long effect time (for example, an effect having a longer effect time than the effect A in FIG. 30 and the effect D in FIG. 36). In addition, since the stop operation period is extremely short, when starting the next game at a good tempo in a short time, for example, a game state (time saving state) accompanied by a state with electric support in which an operation holding ball is likely to occur in a short time. , Probability change state) It is preferable to use it for the normal fluctuation pattern.

The stop operation middle B and the stop operation middle C shown in FIGS. 38 (b) and 38 (c) differ in the stop operation of the middle symbol in the stop operation middle shown in FIG. 29, and the middle symbol stops quickly (short stop of the final stop symbol). It is characterized in that it operates). The point that the middle symbol performs this "short stop operation of the final stop symbol" is the same as the stop operation long shown in FIG. 29. Therefore, it is suitable for starting the next game at a good tempo (when there is at least one operation hold ball) in a situation where a loss is known, such as "non-tempo time (non-reach time)". is there.

The stop operation middle D shown in FIG. 39 (a) and the stop operation long B shown in FIG. 39 (b) are characterized in that the period during the stop operation of each symbol is different (in this example, "left stop". Operating period LMT> Right stop Operating period RMT> Medium stop Operating period CMT "). In these stop motion patterns, it seems that after the left symbol enters the stop motion, the right symbol and the middle symbol are sequentially stopped with good rhythm. For example, "Ta-n ♪ (temporary stop of the left symbol)-> Tan ♪ (temporary stop of the right symbol)-> Tan! (Temporary stop of the middle symbol)". Further, the stop operation middle D or the stop operation long B starts the next game at a good tempo in a situation where a loss such as "non-tempo time (non-reach time)" is known, as in the stop operation long in FIG. It is suitable for making it.

As shown in the figure, the stop operation middle E and the stop operation middle F shown in FIGS. 40 (a) and 40 (b) are characterized in that "left and right simultaneous stop" is possible. In the case of the stop operation middle E, the middle symbol starts the stop operation while the left and right symbols are in the stop operation. Therefore, in terms of production, the left symbol and the right symbol appear on the screen at the same time, and the middle symbol seems to stop in the middle. On the other hand, in the case of the stop operation middle F, the middle symbol seems to stop slowly at the timing when the left symbol and the right symbol are temporarily stopped at the same time. For example, "Tan ♪ (temporary stop on the left and right)-> tan ♪ (temporary stop on the right design)". Since the stop operation middle E and the stop operation middle F perform temporary left and right simultaneous stops, in addition to the case of stopping the lost stitch (for example, the loose stitch), the reach stop motion of FIGS. 36 (a) and 37 (a). It is suitable for forming a reach state by using it for a reach stop operation pattern such as a short circuit.

As shown in the figure, the stop operation middle E and the stop operation middle F shown in FIGS. 40 (a) and 40 (b) are characterized in that "left and right simultaneous stop" is possible. In the case of the stop operation middle E, the middle symbol starts the stop operation while the left and right symbols are in the stop operation. Therefore, in terms of production, the left symbol and the right symbol appear on the screen at the same time, and the middle symbol seems to stop in the middle. On the other hand, in the case of the stop operation middle F, the middle symbol starts the stop operation at substantially the same timing as the timing when the left symbol and the right symbol are temporarily stopped at the same time. Therefore, in terms of production, it seems that the middle symbol slowly stops at the timing when the left symbol and the right symbol temporarily stop at the same time. For example, "Tan ♪ (temporary stop on the left and right)-> tan ♪ (temporary stop on the right design)". Since the stop operation middle E and the stop operation middle F perform temporary left and right simultaneous stops, in addition to the case of stopping the lost stitch (for example, the loose stitch), the reach stop motion of FIGS. 36 (a) and 37 (a). It is suitable for forming a reach state by using it for a reach stop operation pattern such as a short circuit.

Regarding each of the above-mentioned stop operation patterns, the relationship (period LMT, RMT, CMT, LPT, RPT, CPT, LST, RST, CST, etc.) when focusing on each period is as shown in FIGS. 38 to 41. Matters that can be derived from this (for example, the relationship between the length of the high-speed fluctuation period, the relationship between the length of the stop operation period, the relationship between the high and low transmittance, the relationship between the length of the stop operation period, etc.) are self-evident. It is included in the scope of the technical idea of the invention. Needless to say, any of the stop operation patterns shown in FIGS. 38 to 41 can be used as the reach stop operation pattern.

<16. Processing on the production control unit side: FIGS. 16 to 19>
Next, the effect control process on the effect control unit 24 side of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 16 to 19. The processing on the effect control unit 24 side is mainly a predetermined main process (effect control side main process: FIG. 16) and a timer interrupt process activated by a scheduled interrupt from the CTC (effect control side timer interrupt process: It is mainly composed of FIG. 17).

<16. Production control side main processing: Fig. 16>
FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing a main process on the effect control unit side (main process on the effect control side). When the power is turned on from the outside to the game machine main body, the effect control unit 24 starts the main process on the effect control side shown in FIG.

In the main processing on the effect control side, the effect control unit 24 (CPU241) first performs necessary initial setting processing before the start of the game operation (step S1001). Here, as the initial setting processing, for example, command reception interrupt setting, starting point return processing of the movable body accessory, CTC initial setting, timer interrupt permission, initial setting of the register value inside the CPU including each part of the microcomputer, etc. I do.

When the above initial setting process is completed, the main loop process of steps S1003 to S1012 is performed at predetermined time intervals (16 ms) as the process during normal operation, and the effect software random number update process of step S1013 is repeated otherwise.

In the process of step S1002, the CPU 241 refers to the main loop update counter and determines whether or not the main loop update cycle (counter value> 15) that triggers the execution of the main loop process has arrived (step S1002). The main loop update counter is a counter that is incremented during the effect control side timer interrupt process, which is executed every 1 ms (see step S1057 in FIG. 17). In the present embodiment, the main loop processing is performed every about 16 ms, and the main loop update counter value is determined in the determination process of step S1002, and when the value is larger than "15" (step). S1002: YES), assuming that the execution timing of the main loop process has arrived, the processes of steps S1003 to S1011 are executed, and in other cases, until the main loop update cycle arrives (step S1002: NO), the decorative symbol The random numbers for various production lottery used for lottery such as advance notice production during the variable display game are updated (step S1012).

When the main loop update cycle has arrived (step S1002: YES), the main loop update counter is cleared to zero (step S1003), and then error processing is executed (step S1004). Here, the setting of the effect scenario for error notification during an error and the error cancellation process when the error is cleared are executed. It should be noted that errors related to the effect means (movable body accessory error, voice IC error, etc.) are monitored here.

Next, the demo / power saving mode process is executed (step S1005). In this demo / power saving mode process, the demo start waiting effect, the customer waiting effect, and the setting process required for the power saving mode are executed.

Next, the effect switch input process is executed (step S1006). In this effect switch input process, the operation state of the operation means (effect button 13, direction key 75) is monitored, and when an operation is detected, the effect control process corresponding to the operation is executed. The input state of the operating means is monitored by the button input state update process (step S1052) in FIG. 20, which will be described later.

Next, command analysis processing is performed (step S1007). In this command analysis process, it is monitored whether or not the effect control command is stored in the command reception buffer, and if the effect control command is stored, this command is read and the effect process corresponding to the read effect control command is executed. To do. When an interrupt based on the strobe signal from the main control unit 20 side occurs, a command reception interrupt process (not shown) is executed. By this command reception interrupt processing, the effect control command is acquired, and the data is stored in the command reception buffer of the RAM 243.

For example, when at least the variation pattern specification command is received and stored in the reception buffer (in the present embodiment, the variation pattern specification command and the decorative symbol specification command are received and stored in the reception buffer. In the case), in the command analysis process, one or a plurality of types of effect patterns are determined based on the information (variation pattern information and winning information (or winning type information)) included in the command. The production pattern determined here works as a "parts production" as an element constituting the production scenario. Next, a time schedule is determined as to when and how much production time width the above-determined production pattern (parts production) should appear, thereby constructing a production scenario and then The production scenario data is stored in the scenario setting area of the RAM 243. By developing various production patterns (parts production) incorporated in this production scenario one after another or at the same time, a "production scenario" in a broad sense is realized.

After completing the command analysis process, the scenario update process is then executed (step S1008). In this scenario update process, the contents of the timer required to execute the effect scenario are updated, and the process of advancing the effect scenario is executed based on the timer value. A typical one of the above timers is an effect scenario timer that manages a time schedule related to the occurrence timing of the effect. For example, within the variable period in which the special symbol is variablely displayed (special symbol variable period) and within the variable period in which the decorative symbol is variablely displayed (decorative symbol variable period). This timer manages a temporal schedule of what kind of effect pattern appears on the axis, with what time width, and by what effect means. Such an effect scenario timer is also used in the LED drive data update process (step S1010) and the effect accessory operation update process (step S1053), which will be described later. Here, this effect scenario timer is monitored, and when a certain effect occurs, sound data for the speaker 46 and a liquid crystal command for image display control are created and stored in a designated area of the RAM 243. .. The LED data for the optical display device is created in the LED drive data update process (step S1010) described later, and the motor control data for the movable body accessory is created in the effect accessory operation update process (step S1053) described later. To.

Next, sound output processing is performed (step S1009). In this sound output process, the sound data created in the scenario update process of step S1009 is acquired, and if there is sound data to be reproduced, a phrase, volume, etc. are created based on the sound data set for each sound channel. The data is output to the sound control unit (sound source LSI), and the sound effect is displayed from the speaker 46 through the sound control unit. As a result, the sound production according to the production scenario is realized.

Next, the LED drive data update process is executed (step S1010). In this LED drive data update process, LED data for an optical display device such as a decorative lamp 13 and various effect LEDs is created based on the effect scenario data and the effect scenario timer.

Next, the LED output process is executed (step S1011). In this LED output process, the LED data created by the LED drive data update process is output to the light display control unit, and the light emitting means such as the decorative lamp unit 45 and the effect LED is lit and blinked through the light display control unit. As a result, a light effect that matches the effect scenario is realized.

As described above, when the main loop process is completed, the effect software random number update process of step S1013 is performed until the next main loop update cycle arrives.

<17. Effect control side timer interrupt processing: Fig. 17>
Next, with reference to FIG. 17, the timer interrupt processing on the effect control side will be described. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the effect control side timer interrupt process. This effect control side timer interrupt process is activated by an interrupt from the CTC at regular time intervals (1 ms), and is interrupted and executed during the effect control side main process execution.

In FIG. 17, when a timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 201 saves the contents of the register in the stack area (step S1051) and then executes the button input state update process (step S1052). In this button input state update process, when the input state of the operation detection signal from the operation means (effect button 13, direction key 75) is monitored and it is confirmed that the operation detection signal has been received, the detection information is set to the predetermined value of the RAM 243. Store in the area. This operation detection information is used in the scenario update process (step S1009) of FIG. 16 when displaying information related to a player participation type effect, a menu screen, or a menu item. In this embodiment, it is possible to detect a single press, a long press, a continuous hit, and the like.

Next, the effect update operation update process is executed (step S1053). In this effect accessory operation update process, a process of creating motor control data for the movable body accessory is performed based on the effect scenario data and the effect scenario timer.

Next, SOL / MOT output processing is performed (step S1054). In this SOL / MOT output process, the control data for the movable body accessory created by the effect accessory operation update process is output to the drive control unit. The drive control unit outputs a control signal based on the control data to the movable body accessory motor of the movable body accessory to be operated, and controls the operation. As a result, the movable body production by the movable body accessory (clock-shaped accessory 80, flower-shaped accessory 90, etc.) according to the effect scenario is realized.

Next, the liquid crystal command transmission process is performed (step S1055). In this liquid crystal command transmission process, if there is a liquid crystal command created in the scenario update process (step S1009) of FIG. 16, the liquid crystal command is transmitted to the display control unit (liquid crystal control CPU) to display an image on the liquid crystal display device 36. Execute display control. As a result, the image production according to the production scenario is realized.

Next, the RTC information acquisition process is executed (step S1056). In this RTC information acquisition process, date and time information (RTC information) timed by the RTC is acquired. This RTC information is used when displaying an effect based on the RTC information.

Then, the main loop update counter is incremented (step S1057). This main loop update counter is reset in step S1003 during the main processing on the effect control side described above, and is incremented in this processing. Therefore, when step S1057 is executed, the main loop update counter value is any of 0 to 15.

When the process of step S1057 is completed, the contents of the saved register are restored (step S1058), the timer interrupt process is terminated, and the effect control side main process is executed until the next timer interrupt occurs.

<18. Contents of received command analysis processing: FIG. 18, FIG. 19>
18 and 19 show processes that are closely related to the present invention among the processes executed in the received command analysis process (step S1007 of FIG. 16). Hereinafter, the cases where the "hold addition command" and the "decorative symbol specification command" are received will be described.

(Hold addition command reception process: FIG. 18)
In FIG. 18, the effect control unit 24 (CPU 241) first executes a winning command reception confirmation process (step S2201). When the effect control unit 24 receives the winning command, it first analyzes the content of the winning command, acquires the look-ahead determination result information (pre-reading fluctuation pattern information, and stores the acquired information in the look-ahead information storage area of the RAM 243. The winning command reception process (not shown) to be stored is performed. Here, the reception confirmation processing is performed to confirm that the winning command is correctly received and the information is acquired. In the look-ahead information storage area. Similar to the hold storage area of the RAM 203 on the main control side, a look-ahead information storage area corresponding to each of the special figure 1 side and the special figure 2 side is provided. Further, these look-ahead information storage areas are operated. Hold 1 look-ahead information storage area to hold n look-ahead information storage area (n = 4 in this embodiment) corresponding to the number of hold balls are provided, and each can store look-ahead determination result information for the maximum number of hold balls. It has become.

Next, it is determined whether or not the look-ahead determination result information is read-ahead prohibited (step S2203). When the read-ahead prohibition period is set (step S2203: YES), the hold addition command reception process is exited without doing anything.

If the look-ahead is not prohibited (step S2203: NO), the process proceeds to step S2204, and it is determined whether or not the "continuous notice counter" is zero (step S2204). This "continuous notice counter" is a counter for determining a prohibition period for prohibiting the occurrence of duplicate pre-reading notice effects. Specifically, when the current operation hold ball is targeted for execution of the look-ahead notice effect by the look-ahead notice lottery in step S2205 described below, before the current action hold ball is used for the symbol variation display game. , It is a counter for preventing the newly generated operation holding ball from being the execution target of the look-ahead effect. For the reason described above, the "continuous notice counter" stores the current value of the number of pending balls N (see step S2208 described later).

If the continuous notice counter is not zero (step S2204: NO), it is assumed that the look-ahead notice lottery is prohibited, and the hold addition command reception process is exited without doing anything. When the value of the continuous advance notice counter is zero (step 2204: YES), it is assumed that the look-ahead notice lottery is permitted, and the look-ahead notice lottery process is performed (step S2205). This look-ahead effect lottery process performs a lottery as to whether or not to perform a look-ahead notice effect based on the look-ahead variation pattern information specified by the winning command as a result of pre-reading the variation pattern that will be determined at the start of the variation. It is a thing. The "winning command" and the "holding addition command" in the present embodiment are in the form of including information on each of the look-ahead variation pattern and the special symbol type. Therefore, this information is used for the look-ahead notice lottery.

There are two types of pre-reading notices according to this embodiment. One is mainly a pre-reading notice (pending change notice) of the winning time system that occurs when the game ball wins a prize at the starting port and the starting condition is satisfied (that is, when the winning or the starting condition is satisfied). The other one is a look-ahead notice (pre-reading notice during change) of the symbol change middle system that occurs during the symbol change display game that is executed first in chronological order. Therefore, the pre-reading notice lottery includes a lottery as to whether or not to give a pending change notice and a lottery as to whether or not to give a pre-reading notice during fluctuations, and both are performed independently here.

In the pre-reading effect lottery process, a pre-reading notice is drawn by using the pre-reading variation pattern information specified by the winning command and the pre-reading effect lottery table (not shown) (step S2205), and the result of the pre-reading effect lottery is obtained. Based on the effect information (information about the look-ahead effect lottery result) is set (step 2206). This effect information is used when the pre-reading notice is displayed. The effect information set here includes (i) information for designating the hold change notice, for example, an effect scenario related to the hold change notice such as hold color and hold change timing specification information, and (ii) look-ahead notice during change. Information to be specified, for example, a production scenario related to a look-ahead notice during fluctuations such as a notice image type (thunderstorm image, rain image, lightning bolt image) and execution count information, (iii) look-ahead effect lottery non-winning (loss) information (look-ahead notice) Information that is not executed) is included. In the case of this example, since the lottery for whether or not to give a notice of pending change and the lottery for whether or not to give a pre-reading notice during fluctuation are performed independently, there are cases where only the pending change notice is executed. , Only the changing look-ahead notice may be executed, or both the pending change notice and the changing look-ahead notice may be executed, and both the pending change notice and the changing look-ahead notice may be executed. Has a higher expectation of winning than when the look-ahead notice is executed alone.

When the effect control unit 24 executes the look-ahead notice of (i) and (ii), the hold change notice and / or change is based on the effect information (effect scenario related to the look-ahead notice) based on the result of the look-ahead effect lottery. The effect control process required for the middle notice is performed, and thereby, for example, the look-ahead notice shown in FIG. 5B is realized. On the other hand, in the case of the above-mentioned (iii) pre-reading effect lottery non-winning, the pre-reading notice is not executed, and the white hold of the normal hold display (normal hold display mode) is the corresponding hold display unit (a1 to d1 and a2 in FIG. 4). It will be displayed in ~ d2).

As a result of the pre-reading effect lottery process, when the pre-reading notice is executed, the value of the current number of pending balls is stored in the continuous notice counter (step S2208). As a result, the look-ahead notice lottery for new operation-holding balls is prohibited for a certain period of time. It should be noted that this counter value is subtracted by 1 each time the old operation holding ball generated earlier is digested in the decorative symbol designation command reception process of FIG. 19 described later (step S2306 described later). reference). By setting the value of the number of operating hold balls that exist when the pre-reading effect lottery is won as described above in the "continuous notice counter", a new operation hold is performed for the number of symbol fluctuations corresponding to the number of operation hold balls. Even if a ball is generated, the lottery for the pre-reading notice effect is prohibited (step S2204: route of NO). For example, when the current number of reserved balls is three, the look-ahead notice lottery is prohibited during the three symbol changes corresponding to the number of held balls, thereby preventing the occurrence of the look-ahead notice. The above-mentioned "continuous notice counter" can also be used as information regarding the pre-reading notice winning. In other words, if the "continuous notice counter" is zero, it is determined that the look-ahead notice is not being won (pre-reading notice is not executed), and if the value is other than zero, it is determined that the look-ahead notice is being won (pre-reading notice is being executed). it can.

(Decorative pattern specification command reception process: Fig. 19)
With reference to FIG. 19, the effect control unit 24 (CPU 241) first executes the variation pattern designation command reception confirmation process (step S2301). When the effect control unit 24 receives the fluctuation pattern designation command, it first analyzes the content of the command, acquires fluctuation pattern information (variation pattern information at the start of fluctuation), and stores the acquired information in the look-ahead information storage area of the RAM 243. The variable pattern specification command reception process (not shown) to be stored in is performed. Here, it is confirmed that the fluctuation pattern specification command is correctly received and the information is acquired.

Next, the content of the decorative symbol designation command is analyzed, and symbol information regarding the special symbol type and the winning type (symbol lottery result) is acquired (step S2302).

Next, the effect scenario type lottery is executed (step S2303). Here, based on the current production mode (or the current production stage if a production stage is provided) and the fluctuation pattern information, one of the multiple types of production scenarios is drawn for the production scenario during the current symbol change. Determined by. The production scenario includes various production scenarios related to the advance notice production executed during the current symbol change. When the production scenario is determined, the specific type of advance notice effect belonging to the determined advance notice effect type is further determined. For example, there are production scenarios A to C, production scenario A is a production scenario related to a step-up production type, production scenario B is a production scenario related to a player participation type production type, and production scenario C is related to a background change notice. In the case of a production scenario, it is assumed that the production scenario A is determined by the production scenario type lottery. Since this production scenario A is a production scenario related to a step-up effect type (for example, a step-up effect C that ends in one stage, a step-up effect B that develops to two stages, and a step-up effect A that develops to the final stage). , Which of the step-up effects A to C belonging to the step-up effect type is to be executed is determined by a predetermined advance notice effect type lottery. In these step-up effects A to C, the lottery probability is determined according to the fluctuation pattern, and the higher the expectation of winning the fluctuation pattern, the easier it is for the step-up effect C having a relatively high expectation of winning to be drawn. ing. Further, here, other effects (setting suggestion effect and non-notice effect) to be executed in association with the execution of the step-up effect are also determined.

Then, when a specific advance notice effect (here, any of step-up effects A to C) is determined, a variation pattern of the decorative pattern related to the current effect scenario is determined. The effect execution time of the step-up effects A to C is predetermined according to the content of the effect. For example, the step-up effect C for one stage is 9 seconds, and the step-up effect B for two stages is 10 seconds. The step-up effect A that develops to the final stage (3 stages) is set to 12 seconds. Therefore, when the step-up effect C (effect execution time is 9 seconds) is determined by this notice type lottery, the decorative symbol effect with a long stop operation is determined as the decorative symbol effect, and the step-up effect B (effect execution time is 9 seconds). When the effect execution time (10 seconds) is determined, the decorative symbol effect with the stop operation middle is determined as the decorative symbol effect, and when the step-up effect A (effect execution time is 12 seconds) is determined, As a decorative pattern effect, a decorative pattern effect accompanied by a short stop operation is determined. As a result, the decorative design effect shown in FIGS. 30 to 37 is realized. More specifically, when the variation pattern this time is the normal variation 13s, the decorative pattern effect as shown in FIG. 30 is realized.

Regarding another example (FIGS. 31 to 37), when the variation pattern this time is the normal variation 16s and the step-up effect A is determined and the stop operation long is determined, it is shown in FIG. 31. It is possible to realize such a decorative pattern production. Further, when the fluctuation pattern this time is the normal fluctuation 16s and the step-up effect A is determined, the stop operation long or the stop operation middle can be selected, and in the case of the normal fluctuation 13s, the stop operation short can be selected. For example, it is possible to realize a decorative pattern effect as shown in FIG. 32. Further, if the stop operation pattern can be selected according to the step-up effects A to C for the normal fluctuation 16s, the normal fluctuation 13s, and the normal fluctuation 4s, a decorative design effect as shown in FIGS. 33 to 34 can be realized. can do. Further, if the stop operation pattern can be selected according to the effect stages A to C, the decorative pattern effect as shown in FIG. 35 can be realized. Further, when the current variation pattern is the reach variation pattern, the decorative pattern effect as shown in FIGS. 36 to 37 can be realized according to the type of effect to be executed and the current effect stage.

Next, the decorative symbol stop symbol lottery process is performed (step S2304). In this decorative symbol stop symbol lottery process, a temporary stop symbol and a left symbol, a middle symbol, and a right symbol (combination of decorative symbol stop symbols) to be finally stopped are determined by lottery based on the effect scenario and the symbol information. For example, if the content of the fluctuation pattern is a hit fluctuation pattern specified by the reach effect and the winning type information is a 10R probability variation jackpot, the left symbol is first determined by lottery in order to determine the combination of decorative symbols related to the jackpot. Then, the decorative symbol that can form the reach state with the left symbol is determined as the right symbol, and the decorative symbol sequence related to the 10R probability variation jackpot is finally stopped based on the determined left symbol and right symbol. Determine the middle design as follows. Further, if the fluctuation pattern is a normal fluctuation pattern (for example, normal fluctuation 13s), the combination of decorative symbols to be finally stopped is determined so that the lost stitch is stopped and displayed. As a result, the combination of the decorative symbols when the current decorative symbol variation display game is completed is determined, and a series of variable effects (preliminary effect scenario, decorative symbol effect scenario (decorative symbol variation pattern) to be executed during the current symbol variation are determined. Production scenario)) is decided. Then, the scenario data regarding the determined changing effect is set (step S2305).

Next, the continuous advance notice effect management process is executed (step S2306). Here, the effect processing related to the pre-reading notice during fluctuation is performed. For example, the effect processing required for executing the variable look-ahead notice is performed, such as subtraction of the continuous notice counter due to the execution of this game and display processing of the notice image related to the variable look-ahead notice.

Then, when the continuous advance notice effect management process of step S2306 is completed, various setting processes (step S2307) at the start of the decorative symbol variation are performed to exit the decorative symbol designation command reception process. After that, a decorative pattern variation display game based on the above-mentioned production scenario will be started.

The preferred embodiments of the embodiments described above can be summarized as follows (configuration examples 1 to 16). The corresponding elements or contents in the embodiments are shown in parentheses, but the present invention is not limited thereto.

[Configuration Example 1]
An acquisition means (S314 in FIG. 9) for acquiring predetermined game information when the start condition is satisfied, and
A lottery means (S410 in FIG. 10) for executing a lottery regarding winning based on the game information acquired by the acquisition means, and
A symbol display means (special symbol display device 38, liquid crystal display device 36) capable of displaying a variation of a symbol based on a predetermined variation pattern and displaying a lottery result by the lottery means according to a stop display mode of the symbol.
Hold storage means capable of holding and storing up to a predetermined upper limit number of the game information acquired by the acquisition means as hold information (until the game information is used for the variable display operation of the symbol in the symbol display means). (Reserved storage area of RAM 203, S314 (random number storage process) in FIG. 9, S406 (shift process of reserved storage area), S407 (clear process of reserved 4 storage area), etc. in FIG. 10)
One or a plurality of types of variation patterns are defined, and at least a variation pattern selection table (FIGS. 24 to 25) associated with the lottery result by the lottery means and the number of hold storages stored in the hold storage means Fluctuation pattern determination means (FIG. 23, S413 in FIG. 13) for determining the variation pattern based on the variation pattern distribution table)
A symbol display control means (S093 (special symbol management process) in FIG. 7, S305 to S309 in FIG. 8) that controls the variation display operation of the symbol in the symbol display means based on the variation pattern determined by the variation pattern determining means. )When,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a win, a game machine including a hit game control means (S095 (special electric accessory management process) in FIG. 7, FIG. 14) for executing the hit game (hereinafter, "game machine A"). (Called)
The fluctuation pattern is
A reach variation pattern that specifies the execution of the reach effect (for example, a reach variation pattern that specifies N reach or SP reach) and a normal variation pattern that does not specify the execution of the reach effect (normal variation pattern without the reach specification: for example, the normal variation 4s). ~ Normal fluctuation 16s etc.)
The fluctuation pattern selection table is
A hit variation pattern selection table (for example, FB1 to FB4 in FIG. 24) used when the lottery result is a hit, and
The loss variation pattern selection table (for example, FH1 to FH9 in FIG. 25) used when the lottery result is a loss is included.
The loss fluctuation pattern selection table is
A variation pattern selection table for each number of holds (for example, FH1 to FH4 in FIG. 25) used according to each number of holds.
Includes a common variation pattern selection table (eg, FH7 to FH9) commonly used for each hold memory.
Each of the fluctuation pattern selection tables for each number of holdings is characterized in that a plurality of types of normal fluctuation patterns having different fluctuation times are defined (columns of normal fluctuation 4s to normal fluctuation 16s of FH1 to FH4 in FIG. 25). A game machine to be.

Further, the following "configuration example 2" can be used. In addition, substantially the same corresponding elements in parentheses shown in the above "configuration example 1" are omitted as appropriate to avoid duplicate description (the same applies to the configuration example described later).
[Configuration Example 2]
(1) In the game machine A
The fluctuation pattern selection table is
The hit variation pattern selection table used when the lottery result is a hit,
Including the loss fluctuation pattern selection table used when the lottery result is a loss,
The loss fluctuation pattern selection table is
Includes a variation pattern selection table by number of holds used for each number of holds
For the high-frequency fluctuation pattern having the highest selection rate in each of the fluctuation pattern selection tables for each number of holds, the fluctuation time of the symbol related to the high-frequency fluctuation pattern is configured to be different for each change pattern selection table for each number of holds. A game machine featuring a table.
(2) Further, in the configuration example 2, the fluctuation pattern selection table for each number of reservations used when the number of reserved storages is relatively small can set the fluctuation time of the high frequency fluctuation pattern for a longer time. The high-frequency fluctuation pattern corresponds to, for example, the normal fluctuation 16s of the loss fluctuation pattern selection table "FH1", the normal fluctuation 13s of "FH2", the normal fluctuation 8s of "FH3", and the normal fluctuation 4s of "FH4". To do.

Further, the following "configuration example 3" can be used.
[Configuration Example 3]
(1) In the game machine A
The fluctuation pattern selection table is
The hit variation pattern selection table used when the lottery result is a hit,
Including the loss fluctuation pattern selection table used when the lottery result is a loss,
The loss fluctuation pattern selection table is
Includes a variation pattern selection table by number of holds used for each number of holds
The average fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern defined in each holding number-based fluctuation pattern selection table is configured to be different for each holding number-based fluctuation pattern selection table (selection rate of each fluctuation pattern of FH1 to FH4 in FIG. 25). (See), a game machine characterized by that.
(2) Further, in the configuration example 3, the average fluctuation time can be set for a longer time as the fluctuation pattern selection table for each number of reservations used when the number of reserved storages is relatively small (FH1 in FIG. 25). Refer to the selectivity of each fluctuation pattern of ~ FH4: The smaller the number of pending balls, the easier it is to select a fluctuation pattern with a relatively long fluctuation time (high probability of selection).

Further, the following "configuration example 4" can be used.
[Configuration Example 4]
(1) The game machine A is configured to be able to control the game state after the hit game to a privilege game (for example, a game state (time saving state or probability change state) accompanied by a state with electric support) which is more advantageous than a normal game. ,
The fluctuation pattern selection table is
The hit variation pattern selection table used when the lottery result is a hit,
Including the loss fluctuation pattern selection table used when the lottery result is a loss,
The loss fluctuation pattern selection table is
Includes multiple types of lost variation pattern selection tables, including a variation pattern selection table for each hold, which is used according to each hold storage
For the high-frequency fluctuation pattern having the highest selection rate in each of the fluctuation pattern selection tables for each number of holds, the fluctuation time of the symbol related to the high-frequency fluctuation pattern is configured to be different for each change pattern selection table for each number of holds. (Same as [Configuration Example 2] above),
The fluctuation pattern determining means
When the lottery result is lost and the normal game is in progress, the fluctuation pattern is determined based on the fluctuation pattern selection table according to the number of holds (for example, at least FH1 to FH4 are used to determine the fluctuation pattern during the normal state. Configuration to be determined: FIG. 25), when the lottery result is lost and the privilege game is in progress, the variation pattern is determined based on another loss variation pattern selection table different from the hold number-based variation pattern selection table. (For example, the fluctuation pattern is determined using FH8 during the time saving state and FH9 during the probability variation state: FIG. 25).
(2) Further, in the configuration example 4, the loss variation pattern selection table further includes a common variation pattern selection table commonly used for each reserved storage number.
When the lottery result is lost and the privilege game is in progress, the variation pattern determining means determines the variation pattern based on the common variation pattern selection table as the other loss variation pattern selection table. (For example, the fluctuation pattern is determined using FH8 during the time saving state. The fluctuation pattern is determined using FH9 during the probability variation state: FIG. 25). It should be noted that the privileged game corresponds to at least a game state accompanied by a state with electric support, in other words, a game state in which the starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than in the normal state (a game state in which it is easier to enter the starting port). Specifically, the privilege game can be at least one of a time saving state and a probability change state. In addition, when the latent probability state is provided, if the lottery result is lost and the latent probability state is in effect, the fluctuation pattern may be determined based on the fluctuation pattern selection table for each number of holds. This is because the latent probability state is a gaming state accompanied by a state without electric support as in the normal state, and is a gaming state in which the starting condition is difficult to be satisfied (a gaming state in which it is easy to enter the starting port).

Further, the following "configuration example 5" can be used.
[Configuration Example 5]
(1) The game machine A is configured to be able to control the game state after the hit game to a privilege game that is more advantageous than the normal game.
The fluctuation pattern selection table is
The hit variation pattern selection table used when the lottery result is a hit,
Including the loss fluctuation pattern selection table used when the lottery result is a loss,
The loss fluctuation pattern selection table is
Includes multiple types of lost variation pattern selection tables, including a variation pattern selection table for each hold, which is used according to each hold storage
The average fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern defined in each holding number-based fluctuation pattern selection table is configured to be different for each holding number-based fluctuation pattern selection table (similar to the above [configuration example 3]).
The fluctuation pattern determining means
When the lottery result is lost and the normal game is in progress, the fluctuation pattern is determined based on the fluctuation pattern selection table according to the number of holds (for example, at least FH1 to FH4 are used to determine the fluctuation pattern during the normal state. Configuration to be determined: FIG. 25), when the lottery result is lost and the privilege game is in progress, the variation pattern is determined based on another loss variation pattern selection table different from the hold number-based variation pattern selection table. (For example, the fluctuation pattern is determined using FH8 during the time saving state and FH9 during the probability variation state: FIG. 25).
(2) Further, in the configuration example 5, the loss variation pattern selection table further includes a common variation pattern selection table commonly used for each reserved storage number.
When the lottery result is lost and the privilege game is in progress, the variation pattern determining means is configured to determine the variation pattern based on the common variation pattern selection table as the other loss variation pattern selection table. (For example, the variation pattern is determined using FH8 during the time saving state. The variation pattern is determined using FH9 during the probability variation state: FIG. 25).

Further, the following "configuration example 6" can be used.
[Configuration Example 6]
(1) A game control means that comprehensively controls the game operation related to the progress of the game (main control unit 20),
The symbol display means (special symbol display devices 38a, 38b) controlled by the game control means and configured to be able to execute the variable display operation of the symbol, and
An effect control means (effect control unit 24) that executes and controls an effect by the effect means based on a control command from the game control means.
A gaming machine configured to be able to control a special game (big hit game or small hit game) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game when the stop display mode of the symbol in the symbol display means becomes a specific stop display mode. And
The game control means
An acquisition means for acquiring predetermined game information when the start condition is satisfied,
A lottery means for executing a lottery regarding winning based on the game information acquired by the acquisition means, and
With the game information acquired by the acquisition means as hold information, a hold storage means capable of holding and storing up to a predetermined upper limit number, and a hold storage means.
One or a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns are defined, and the fluctuation pattern is determined based on at least the fluctuation pattern selection table associated with the lottery result by the lottery means and the number of hold storages stored in the hold storage means. Fluctuation pattern determination means to determine,
A look-ahead determination means (S320 (random number determination process at the time of winning a start opening) in FIG. 9) for pre-reading determination of a variation pattern determined by the variation pattern determining means,
A pre-reading determination command transmitting means (S321 in FIG. 9) that transmits a pre-reading command including information that can identify the pre-reading determination result by the pre-reading determining means to the effect control means.
A symbol display control means (S093 (special symbol management process) in FIG. 7, S305 to S309 in FIG. 8) that controls the variation display of the symbol in the symbol display means based on the variation pattern determined by the variation pattern determining means. Including and
The effect control means
A look-ahead notice effect control means (S1007 (command analysis process) in FIG. 16) capable of executing and controlling a look-ahead notice effect based on information about the look-ahead determination result included in the look-ahead command when the read-ahead command is received. FIG. 18 (hold addition command reception process)) is included.
The fluctuation pattern selection table is
The hit variation pattern selection table used when the lottery result is a hit,
Including the loss fluctuation pattern selection table used when the lottery result is a loss,
The loss fluctuation pattern selection table is
A variation pattern selection table for each number of reservations used according to the number of retentions (for example, a variation pattern selection table referred to in the case of loss A: FIG. 25) and
A common variation pattern selection table commonly used for the reserved storage number (for example, a variation pattern selection table referred to in the case of loss B or C: FIG. 25) is included.
The fluctuation pattern selection table for each number of holds is
The first specific variation pattern (for example, the first specific normal variation pattern (normal variation 16s)) can be determined with different selectivity according to the number of reserved storages (column in the normal column of FIG. 25).
The common variation pattern selection table is
A second specific fluctuation pattern (for example, a second specific normal fluctuation pattern (normal fluctuation for pre-reading notice 16s)) in which a fluctuation time substantially the same as the fluctuation time of the first specific fluctuation pattern is defined can be determined (for example). , FH5 in FIG. 25),
The read-ahead determination command transmission means is
When the pre-reading determination means determines that the first specific variation pattern is the pre-reading command, the pre-reading command is the first pre-reading command (for example, the column of the normal variation 16s in FIGS. 25 and 27 (command data = B004H)). And send
When the pre-reading determination means determines that the second specific variation pattern is pre-reading, the pre-reading command is a second pre-reading command different from the first pre-reading command (for example, the pre-reading notice of FIGS. 25 and 27). It is configured to transmit the column of normal fluctuation 16s (command data = B005H)).
The look-ahead notice effect control means
At least when the look-ahead command is the second look-ahead command (when the information included in the look-ahead command is the second specific variation pattern: for example, when the look-ahead determination result information is the read-ahead notice normal variation 16s). , A gaming machine characterized in that the pre-reading notice effect (pending change notice and / or pre-reading notice during change) can be executed.
(2) Further, in the configuration example 6, when the look-ahead command is the first look-ahead command (when the information included in the look-ahead command is the first specific variation pattern), the look-ahead notice effect control means The pre-reading notice effect is not executed, or the pre-reading notice effect is executed, but the execution probability is configured to be executed with a lower probability than when the execution probability is the second pre-reading command (in the case of the second specific variation pattern). be able to. In addition, when the pre-reading notice is executed with the low probability, the pre-reading notice related to the first specific fluctuation pattern (normal fluctuation 16s) has a relative winning expectation than the pre-reading notice related to the second specific fluctuation pattern. It may be configured to execute a low look-ahead notice. For example, in the case of the first specific variation pattern, the special hold display of blue hold or less can be executed, and in the second specific variation pattern, the special hold display of yellow hold or less can be executed.

Further, the following "configuration example 7" can be used.
[Configuration Example 7]
In the above configuration example 6,
The game control means
Further including a variation start command transmission means for transmitting a variation pattern designation command including information capable of identifying the variation pattern determined by the variation pattern determining means to the effect control means (S413 in FIG. 10).
The effect control means
When the fluctuation pattern designation command is received, a predetermined fluctuation effect (symbol fluctuation) is performed during the symbol fluctuation display operation of the symbol display means based on the information about the fluctuation pattern included in the fluctuation pattern designation command. Further includes variable effect control means (S1007 (command analysis process) in FIG. 16 and FIG. 19 (decorative symbol designation command reception process)) capable of executing an effect (effect executed during the display game).
The effect control means during fluctuation is
Depending on whether the information regarding the fluctuation pattern is the first specific fluctuation pattern or the second specific fluctuation pattern, the same effect during fluctuation can be configured to be feasible.
In addition, "pre-reading notice during fluctuation" is also an effect executed during the symbol fluctuation display game, but the pre-reading notice during fluctuation is determined based on the look-ahead command (command at the time of winning) instead of the fluctuation pattern specification command. Since it is an effect (see S321 in FIG. 9, S1007 in FIG. 16, 18 and the like), it can be excluded from the concept of the effect during fluctuation.

Further, the following "configuration example 8" can be used.
[Configuration Example 8]
A game control means that comprehensively controls the game operation related to the progress of the game, a symbol display means that is controlled by the game control means and configured to be able to execute a variable display operation of the symbol,
An effect control means that executes and controls an effect by the effect means based on a control command from the game control means.
A gaming machine configured to be able to control a special game that is more advantageous to the player than a normal game when the stop display mode of the symbol in the symbol display means becomes a specific stop display mode.
The game control means
An acquisition means for acquiring predetermined game information when the start condition is satisfied,
A lottery means for executing a lottery regarding winning based on the game information acquired by the acquisition means, and
With the game information acquired by the acquisition means as hold information, a hold storage means capable of holding and storing up to a predetermined upper limit number, and a hold storage means.
One or a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns are defined, and the fluctuation pattern is determined based on at least the fluctuation pattern selection table associated with the lottery result by the lottery means and the number of hold storages stored in the hold storage means. Fluctuation pattern determination means to determine,
A pre-reading determination means for pre-reading and determining a variation pattern determined by the variation pattern determining means,
A pre-reading determination command transmitting means for transmitting a pre-reading command including information capable of specifying a pre-reading determination result by the pre-reading determining means to the effect control means, and
A symbol display control means for controlling the variation display of the symbol in the symbol display means based on the variation pattern determined by the variation pattern determining means is included.
The effect control means
When the read-ahead command is received, the look-ahead notice effect control means capable of executing and controlling the look-ahead notice effect based on the information about the look-ahead determination result included in the look-ahead command is included.
The fluctuation pattern selection table is
The hit variation pattern selection table used when the lottery result is a hit,
Including the loss fluctuation pattern selection table used when the lottery result is a loss,
The loss fluctuation pattern selection table is
A variation pattern selection table for each number of holds used according to the number of holds,
Including a common variation pattern selection table commonly used for the reserved storage number
The fluctuation pattern selection table for each number of holds is
Depending on the number of reserved storages, one of a first specific fluctuation pattern (for example, normal fluctuation 16s) and a shortened fluctuation pattern having a shorter fluctuation time than the first specific fluctuation pattern (for example, normal fluctuation 4s) is determined. Possible to be configured
The common variation pattern selection table is
The second specific fluctuation pattern (for example, normal fluctuation 16s for pre-reading notice), which has a fluctuation time substantially the same as the fluctuation time of the first specific fluctuation pattern, can be determined.
The read-ahead determination command transmission means is
When the pre-reading determination means determines that the first specific variation pattern is pre-reading, the first pre-reading command is transmitted as the pre-reading command.
When the pre-reading determination means determines that the second specific variation pattern is pre-reading, the pre-reading command is configured to transmit a second pre-reading command different from the first pre-reading command.
The look-ahead notice effect control means
At least when the look-ahead command is the second look-ahead command (when the information included in the look-ahead command is the second specific variation pattern), the game is configured to be able to execute the look-ahead notice effect. Machine.

Further, the following configuration examples 9 to 16 can be summarized as preferable embodiments of the decorative symbol effect (decorative symbol stop operation pattern).

[Configuration Example 9]
(1) A symbol display that variablely displays a plurality of symbols (for example, a plurality of decorative symbols such as a left symbol, a middle symbol, and a right symbol: FIGS. 5A and 5B) according to the lottery result of whether or not to generate a profit state. Means (liquid crystal display device 36) and
In a game machine provided with an effect executing means (effect control unit 24) capable of executing an effect while the symbol is changed by the symbol display means.
In the predetermined variation display of the predetermined variation time (for example, the variation display of the decorative symbol according to the normal variation 13s in FIG. 30),
The first variation display in which the stop operation period from the time when at least one symbol first starts the stop operation to the stop of all the symbols is the first period (for example, the variation display for executing the stop operation short: FIG. 29 (a). ), FIG. 30 (a)), or a second variation display in which the stop operation period is a second period longer than the first period (for example, a variation display for executing the stop operation middle: FIG. 29 (b), FIG. 30 (b)) may be executed,
The effect includes a first effect that ends at the first end timing during the predetermined fluctuation time, and a second effect that ends at a second end timing that is later than the first end timing (for example, FIG. 30). The difference between the end timing of production A and the end timing of production B),
When executing the first effect, the first variation display is executed (FIG. 30A).
When the second effect is executed, the second variation display is executed (FIG. 30 (b)).
A game machine characterized by that.
(2) In the configuration example 9, the first effect is terminated before at least the first stop symbol in the first variation display starts the stop operation (for example, the effect A shown in FIG. 30A). ,
The second effect is characterized in that at least the first stop symbol in the second variation display is terminated before the stop operation is started (for example, the effect B shown in FIG. 30B).
(3) Further, in the above (1) or (2) of the configuration example 9, in the fluctuation display of the predetermined fluctuation time, the third fluctuation display in which the stop operation period is a third period longer than the second period (3) For example, a variable display for executing a long stop operation: FIGS. 29 (c) and 30 (c) may be executed, and neither the first effect nor the second effect is executed (for example, FIG. When the effect C of 30 is executed), the third variation display can be executed.

[Configuration Example 10]
A symbol display means that displays a plurality of symbols in a variable manner according to the lottery result of whether or not to generate a profit state,
In a game machine provided with an effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect while the symbol is changed by the symbol display means.
For the symbol variation display,
The first variation display in which the stop operation period from the time when at least one symbol first starts the stop operation to the stop of all the symbols is the first period (for example, the variation display for executing the stop operation short: FIG. 31 (c). ))When,
A second variation display (for example, a variation display for executing the stop operation middle: FIG. 31 (b)), which is a second period in which the stop operation period is longer than the first period,
There is a third variation display (for example, a variation display for executing a long stop operation: FIG. 31 (a)), which is a third period in which the stop operation period is longer than the second period.
When the predetermined effect is executed when the fluctuation time is the first fluctuation time, the first fluctuation display is executed (for example, when the fluctuation time is 13s, the stop operation short: FIG. 31 (c)).
When the predetermined effect is executed when the fluctuation time is the second fluctuation time longer than the first fluctuation time, the third fluctuation display is executed (for example, when the fluctuation time is 16s, the stop operation is long: FIG. 31 (Fig. 31). a)), a game machine characterized by the above.

[Configuration Example 11]
(1) A symbol display means for variablely displaying a plurality of symbols according to the lottery result of whether or not to generate a profit state, and
An effect executing means capable of executing a plurality of types of effects while the symbol is changed by the symbol display means.
In a game machine equipped with
For the symbol variation display,
There is a first predetermined fluctuation display of the first fluctuation time (for example, normal fluctuation 13s) and a second predetermined fluctuation display (for example, normal fluctuation 4s) whose fluctuation time is shorter than the first fluctuation time.
In the first predetermined variation display, among a plurality of types of variation displays in which the stop operation period from the time when at least one symbol first starts the stop operation to the time when all the symbols stop is different depending on the effect to be executed. (For example, FIGS. 34 (a) to 34 (c)), and the variable display of any of the above is executed.
In the second predetermined variation display, among the plurality of types of variation display, the number of variation displays in which the first predetermined variation display is smaller than the number of feasible types of variation display is executed (for example, FIG. 34 (d)). (E)), a gaming machine characterized by this.
(2) In this configuration example 11, in the second predetermined variation display, one specific variation display among the plurality of types of variation displays in which the first predetermined variation display can be executed can be executed (for example). , Only the variation display accompanied by the stop operation short circuit is executed: FIG. 34 (d) :).

[Configuration Example 12]
A symbol display means that displays a plurality of symbols in a variable manner according to the lottery result of whether or not to generate a profit state,
In a game machine provided with an effect executing means capable of executing a plurality of types of effects while the symbol is changed by the symbol display means.
For the symbol variation display,
There is a first predetermined fluctuation display of the first fluctuation time and a second predetermined fluctuation display in which the fluctuation time is shorter than the first fluctuation time.
In the first predetermined variation display, among a plurality of types of variation displays in which the stop operation period from the time when at least one symbol first starts the stop operation to the time when all the symbols stop is different depending on the effect to be executed. Perform one of the variable displays (eg, FIGS. 34A-34).
In the second predetermined variation display,
Of the fluctuation displays in which the first predetermined fluctuation display can be executed, fluctuation displays other than the fluctuation display of the longest stop operation period (for example, the fluctuation display of the stop operation other than the stop operation long (stop operation middle or stop operation short)) : A gaming machine characterized by executing FIGS. 34 (d) and 34 (e).

[Configuration Example 13]
(1) A symbol display means for variablely displaying a plurality of symbols according to the lottery result of whether or not to generate a profit state, and
In a game machine provided with an effect executing means capable of executing a plurality of types of effects while the symbol is changed by the symbol display means.
In the predetermined fluctuation display of the predetermined fluctuation time,
Depending on the effect executed by the effect executing means, at least one of the plurality of symbols (for example, the left symbol and the right symbol) constituting the reach state first starts the stop operation, and then the plurality of symbols are used. One of a plurality of types of reach variation displays having different reach configuration operation periods until the reach state is configured is executed (for example, FIGS. 36A to 36C).
Regardless of which reach variation display is executed, the timing at which the reach state is reached (for example, the timing at which both the left symbol and the right symbol are stopped (temporarily stopped) to form the reach state: FIG. 36 (a). )-(C)) are substantially the same.
(2) Further, in the configuration example 13, the effect executing means can execute a specific effect (tempai effect) when the reach state is reached, and any of the plurality of types of reach variation display is executed. Even if there is, the specific effect can be executed (for example, the tempai effect after the reach in FIG. 36).

[Configuration Example 14]
(1) A symbol display means for variablely displaying a plurality of symbols according to the lottery result of whether or not to generate a profit state, and
An effect executing means capable of executing an effect while the symbol is changed by the symbol display means,
In a game machine equipped with
The effect executing means can execute an effect corresponding to an effect stage set from a plurality of types of effect stages (for example, effect stages A to C: FIGS. 35 and 37).
In the predetermined fluctuation display of the predetermined fluctuation time,
Depending on the effect stage, the reach configuration operation period from when at least one symbol of the plurality of symbols constituting the reach state first starts the stop operation to when the reach state by the plurality of symbols is configured is different. Execute one of the multiple types of reach variation display,
Regardless of which reach variation display is executed, the timing at which the reach state is reached (for example, the timing at which both the left symbol and the right symbol are stopped (temporarily stopped) to form the reach state: FIG. 37 (a). ) To (c)) are substantially the same.
(2) In the configuration example 14, the effect executing means can execute a specific effect (tempai effect) when the reach state is reached, and any of the plurality of types of reach variation display is executed. Even if there is, the specific effect can be executed (for example, the tempai effect after the reach in FIG. 37).

[Configuration Example 15]
(1) A symbol display means that displays a plurality of symbols in a variable manner according to the lottery result of whether or not to generate a profit state, temporarily stops and then displays a combination of symbols according to the lottery result, and then confirms and stops.
In a game machine equipped with
The predetermined fluctuation display of the predetermined fluctuation time is
Let LMT (seconds) be the time during the first stop operation from the time when the first temporarily stopped symbol starts the stop operation to the time when the symbol temporarily stops.
The following relational expression (1) is satisfied when the time during the second stop operation from the time when the last temporarily stopped symbol starts the stop operation to the time when the symbol temporarily stops is CMT (seconds) (for example, FIG. 28 (a), FIG. 29 (c): A description of the relationship between the left stop operation period LMT of the stop operation long and the middle stop operation period CMT).
LMT> CMT (1)
(2) Further, in the configuration example 15, the symbol display means has a high-speed fluctuation display in which the symbol is displayed with the first transmittance and a second transmittance lower than the first transmittance as the variation display of the symbol. It is possible to execute the slow fluctuation display displayed in
In the predetermined fluctuation display of the predetermined fluctuation time, during the first stop operation, the second and subsequent temporarily stopped symbols are in the high-speed fluctuation display (for example, FIGS. 28 (a) and 29 (c): While the left symbol is stopped, the right symbol and the middle symbol are described during high-speed fluctuation).

[Configuration Example 16]
(1) A symbol display means that displays a plurality of symbols in a variable manner according to the lottery result of whether or not to generate a profit state, temporarily stops and then displays a combination of symbols according to the lottery result, and then confirms and stops.
In a game machine equipped with
The predetermined fluctuation display of the predetermined fluctuation time is
The time during the first stop operation from the time when the second temporarily stopped symbol starts the stop operation to the time when the symbol temporarily stops is defined as RMT (seconds).
When the time during the second stop operation from the time when the last temporarily stopped symbol starts the stop operation to the time when the symbol temporarily stops is CMT (seconds), the following relational expression (1) is satisfied (for example, 28 (a), 29 (c): A description of the relationship between the right stop operation period RMT of the stop operation long and the middle stop operation period CMT).
RMT> CMT (1)
(2) Further, in the configuration example 16, the symbol display means has a high-speed variable display in which the symbol is displayed at the first transmittance and a second transmittance lower than the first transmittance as the variable display of the symbol. It is possible to execute the slow fluctuation display displayed in
In the predetermined fluctuation display of the predetermined fluctuation time, the symbol that is temporarily stopped last is in the high-speed fluctuation display during the second stop operation (for example, FIG. 28 (a), FIG. 29 (c): right symbol. During the stop operation of, the middle symbol is described during high-speed fluctuation).

It may be a configuration in which one or a plurality of all the embodiments described above (including all the configurations and modifications described in each embodiment) are combined, and the contents described in each embodiment are limited to individual embodiments. It is not limited. For example, the configuration relating to the variation pattern selection technology of the configuration examples 1 to 8 and the technology relating to the stop operation pattern of the configuration examples 9 to 16 can be appropriately combined.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a ball game machine that uses a game ball as a game medium has been described, but the present invention is not limited to the ball game machine. For example, it may be an arrange ball machine or a sparrow ball game machine, and as other game media, a game machine using a game medal (rotary body type game machine) or a game medium using an electromagnetic recording means is used. It may be a managed game machine to be managed.

The present invention is useful for gaming machines.

1 game machine,
2 Front frame (door),
3, 3a game board, game area,
19 Game ball payout device,
20 Main control unit (main control board),
24 Production control unit (Production control board, LCD control board)
28 Launch control board,
29 Payout control board,
34, 34a Upper start port, upper start port sensor 35, 35a Lower start port, lower start port sensor,
37, 37a Normal symbol start port, normal symbol start port sensor,
38a, 38b special symbol display device,
39a Ordinary symbol display device,
50, 52a Large winning opening, large winning opening sensor 41, 41c Ordinary variable winning device, ordinary electric accessory solenoid,
52, 52c Special variable winning device, large winning opening solenoid,
36, 45, 46 Liquid crystal display, decorative lamp, speaker,
49 out mouth,
94 setting key switch,
95 setting change switch,
96 Setting change completion switch,
97 Setting indicator,
98 RAM clear switch,
201, 202, 203 Main control CPU, main control ROM, main control RAM,
241 and 242, 243 effect control CPU, effect control ROM, effect control RAM.

Claims (2)

A symbol display means that displays a plurality of symbols in a variable manner according to the lottery result of whether or not to generate a profit state, temporarily stops and then displays a combination of symbols according to the lottery result, and then confirms and stops.
In a game machine equipped with
The predetermined fluctuation display of the predetermined fluctuation time is
Let LMT (seconds) be the time during the first stop operation from the time when the first temporarily stopped symbol starts the stop operation to the time when the symbol temporarily stops.
The following relational expression (1) is satisfied when the time during the second stop operation from the time when the last temporarily stopped symbol starts the stop operation to the time when the symbol temporarily stops is CMT (seconds).
A game machine that features that.
LMT> CMT (1) The symbol display means has, as the variation display of the symbol, a high-speed variation display in which the symbol is displayed with a first transmittance and a low-speed variation display in which the symbol is displayed with a second transmittance lower than the first transmittance. Feasible and
In the predetermined fluctuation display of the predetermined fluctuation time,
During the first stop operation, the second and subsequent temporarily stopped symbols are displaying the high-speed fluctuation.
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the gaming machine is characterized in that.